2020 BMW x5 76636 PDF

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL.
THE BMW X5.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402913686 - X/19

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW X5.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most
current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest infor‐
mation.
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 6
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 14
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 16
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 20
On the road ...................................................................................................................... 24
CONTROLS
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 32
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................................... 37
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 40
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 57
General settings ............................................................................................................. 60
Personal settings ........................................................................................................... 65
Connections .................................................................................................................... 70
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 78
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................................... 111
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 128
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 134
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 152
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 170
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 178
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 219
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 225
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 272
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 279
4
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 297
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 308
Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 313
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 322
Trailer towing ................................................................................................................ 327
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 331
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 338
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 340
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 375
Operating materials .................................................................................................... 378
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 385
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 387
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 391
Care ................................................................................................................................. 398
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 402
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 407
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 408
© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID7 X/19, 11 19 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ Service center
lar topic is by using the index.
A service center will be glad to answer questions
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Validity of the Owner's Manual Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, for instance, on technology, are available
Production of the vehicle on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Integrated Owner's Manual in the
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
vehicle
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
the vehicle. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
played on the Control Display.
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
After a software update in the

BMW Driver’s Guide app
vehicle The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐
and tablets.
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
Entertainment, Communication
only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a Guide Web can be displayed in any current
printed book from the service center. browser.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
6
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays Vehicle features and

options
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Symbol Meaning all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
Precautions that must be followed in
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
order to avoid the possibility of injury
lustrates features and functions that are not
to yourself and to others as well as
available in a vehicle, for example because of the
serious damage to the vehicle.
selected optional features or the country-specific
Measures that can be taken to help version.
protect the environment. This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions. When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the served.
voice activation system.
For any options and equipment not described in
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
activation system. Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW service center is happy to answer any
Action steps questions that you may have about the features
and options applicable to your vehicle.
Action steps to be carried out are presented as a
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
Status of the Owner's
1. First action step. Manual
2. Second action step.
Basic information
Enumerations
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
native possibilities are presented as a list with
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
bullet points.
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
▷ First possibility. cases, therefore, the features described in this
▷ Second possibility. Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
Validity of the Owner's Manual
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual. Production of the vehicle
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
7
NOTES Information
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair
the vehicle. work.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐
After a software update in the ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility
vehicle that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair,
according to BMW specifications with properly
trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop".
information.
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
For Your Own Safety quent damage and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
Intended use can lead to a failure or malfunction of compo‐
nents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result
Heed the following when using the vehicle: in a safety risk.
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove Parts and accessories
stickers. BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
▷ Technical vehicle data. sory products approved by BMW.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
vehicle is driven. their use and installation are available from a
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. BMW center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
Warranty BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
cles.
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
applying in the country of first delivery, also sories.
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
operated in a different country it might be neces‐ product from another manufacturer can be used
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
operating conditions and registration require‐ hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
homologation requirements in a certain country these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for under all usage conditions.
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a service center. California Proposition 65
Warning
Maintenance and repairs
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
Advanced technology, for instance the use of vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
modern materials and high-performance elec‐ warning:
8
Information NOTES
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Warning ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
bile components and parts, including compo‐
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
Warranty.
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth Detailed information about these warranties is
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ listed in the Service and Warranty Information
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
products of component wear contain or emit Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
chemicals known to the State of California to Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ tions and homologation requirements in your
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ country and continental region in order to deliver
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
known to the State of California to cause can‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and mologation requirements. You should also be
water. For more information go to aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
Maintenance
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, Limited Warranty.
which are known to the State of California to Specifications for maintenance measures:
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a US models.
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ Canadian models.
hicle. For more information go to If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. maintained, this could result in serious damage
to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by
the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Service and warranty
Refer to chapter engine oil change regarding
We recommend that you read this publication recommended service intervals for oil changes.
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
NOTES Information
Data memory This information generally records the state of a

component, a module, a system, or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
General information ▷ Operating states of system components, for
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
hicle. Electronic control units process data they tery status.
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
exchange with each other. Some control units components, for instance lights and brakes.
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or
provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. ment of the driving stability control systems.
Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.

be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ The data is required to perform the control unit
cle, in a separate booklet, for example. functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐
nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐
Personal reference hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle The majority of this data is volatile and is only
identification number. Depending on the country, processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ share of the data is stored event-related in event
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ or fault memories.
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
options to track data collected in the vehicle to ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the ance measures, this technical information can be
ConnectedDrive account that is used. read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number.
Operating data in the vehicle A dealer’s service center or another qualified
Control units process data to operate the vehicle. service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
For example, this includes:
sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ out the data.
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
The data is collected, processed, and used by
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse
the relevant organizations in the service network.
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.
The data documents technical conditions of the
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault,
sensor signals. compliance with warranty obligations and quality
The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ improvement.
hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
stored beyond the operating period. monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐ bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
nical information. Information about the vehicle The data from the vehicle can also be used to
condition, component usage, maintenance re‐ check customer claims for warranty and guar‐
quirements events or faults can be stored tem‐ anty.
porarily or permanently.
10
Information NOTES
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
reset when a dealer’s service center or another control elements.
qualified service center or repair shop performs The sound and picture from the mobile device
repair or servicing work. can be played back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
Data entry and data transfer into ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
the vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
General information general vehicle information. This optimizes the
way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort
tion or music playback, work.
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐
cle and modified or reset at any time. There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, such as active access
For example, this includes:
to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
How the data will be processed further is deter‐
tions.
mined by the provider of the particular app being
▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating
tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services
spective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ General information
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
system. this enables data to be exchanged between the
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
an integrated hands-free system or an connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
integrated navigation system. ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
phones. This wireless network connection
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the
found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it Services from the vehicle
can be deleted at any time. manufacturer
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
personal request as part of the use of online turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
services. The transmission depends on the se‐ are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
lected settings for the use of the services. stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
Incorporation of mobile devices to data protection is provided there too. Personal
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐ data may be used to perform online services.
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
11
NOTES Information
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle This data can help provide a better understand‐
manufacturer intended for this purpose. ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
Any collection, processing, and use of personal injuries occur.
data above and beyond that needed to provide EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
the services must always be based on a legal nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
permission, contractual arrangement or consent. corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the tions and no personal data, for instance name,
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
ception of functions and services required by law However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
such as Assist systems. ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
Services from other providers during a crash investigation.
When using online services from other providers, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
vant provider and subject to their data privacy EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
changed during this process. Information on the formation if they have access to the vehicle or
way in which personal data is collected and used the EDR.
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider. Vehicle identification
number
Event Data Recorder EDR
Engine compartment
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
The vehicle identification number can be found
such data as:
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ side of the vehicle.
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
12
Information NOTES
Windshield You can also obtain other information about mo‐

tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive, refer to page 71.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590.
13
NOTES Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Printed Owner's Manual
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
Concept
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, fered with the series.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as a
General information printed book from the service center.
Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals

You can use various media formats to call up the Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals,
content in the Owner's Manual. The following which are included in addition to the onboard lit‐
Owner's Manual media formats are available: erature.
▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Integrated Owner's Manual
Validity of the Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Production of the vehicle Concept
At the time of production at the plant, the printed The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
Owner's Manual is the most current resource. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ cle.
ences may exist between the printed Owner's The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in on the Control Display.
the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Selecting the Owner's Manual
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
1. Press the button.
After a software update in the 2. "CAR"
vehicle
3. "Owner's Manual"
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐ 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
14
Owner's Manual media NOTES
Scrolling through the Owner's

2. Press the desired programmable
Manual memory button and hold for more than 2 sec‐
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous onds.
contents are displayed.
Executing
Context help
Press the corresponding button.
General information The owner's manual is directly dis‐

played at the selected entry point.
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
played directly.
Opening via iDrive

Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:

2. "Help"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The entry points into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons
and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Picture search"
▷ "User help"
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Topics"
▷ "Quick link"
15
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing 2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 To open the tailgate
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode Buttons for the central locking system.
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Locking
Unlocking the vehicle Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ Unlocking
locked.
Press the button.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
other vehicle access points. Panic mode
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
cle key after unlocking. self in a dangerous situation.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
as long as the button on the vehicle key is and hold for at least 3 seconds.
pressed. ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
three times in succession.
Locking the vehicle
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
1. Close the driver's door.
16
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

with no-touch activation
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operating Concept
the vehicle key. The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your touch activation using the vehicle key you are
pants pocket, is sufficient. carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key Performing the foot movement
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Tailgate
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

on the outside of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

hicle key for approx. 1 second.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
With Comfort Access: Depending on the set‐ Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tings, the bottom tailgate also opens. tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
is started or standby state is switched on.
Closing
1. Without Comfort Access: closing the lower Driver's door
tailgate manually.
With Comfort Access: the lower tailgate will
be closed automatically with the upper tail‐
gate.
2. Press the button on the inside of the upper
tailgate.
1 Safety switch
Displays and control 2 Power windows
elements 3 Central locking system
4 Exterior mirrors
In the vicinity of the steering 5 Seats, comfort features
wheel 6 Opening/closing the tailgate
Switch console
1 Light switch element

2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster 1 Selector lever
4 Wipers 2 Controller
3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
Indicator/warning lights 4 Driving Dynamics Control
5 Start/Stop button
Instrument cluster
6 Assistance systems
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
18
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
iDrive Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel
Concept or ›Cancel‹.
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
the Controller. vation system is deactivated.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Opens the main menu.
Opens the Apps menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for

navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
vation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the

function via iDrive.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering Distance to the back of the head
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
1 Backrest width
2 Thigh support Side extensions
3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
4 Upper backrest
5 Backrest tilt, head restraint
6 Lumbar support
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐
eral support.
Push switch up or down.
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

1. Set the desired position.
2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

ing on the button lights up.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door
while the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Infotainment
Radio
Adjusting the steering wheel
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
1 Changing the entertainment source

2 Sound output on/off, volume
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height 3 Programmable memory buttons
and angle to suit your seating position by press‐ 4 Changing the station/track
ing the switch. 5 Waveband/satellite radio
Memory function Navigation destination entry

Concept Entering a destination via quick
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ search
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position. 1. Press the button on the Controller.
▷ Exterior mirror position. 2. "Where to?"
▷ Steering wheel position. 3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. The search term may be completed automat‐
ically in gray print.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Press or move the controller up to apply the Using the phone

suggested search term.
4. Select the symbol, if needed. Accepting a call
Results are displayed in a list. Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can
5. "Search location": select search location. be answered in several ways.
6. Move the Controller to the right. ▷ Via iDrive:
7. Select desired destination. "Accept"

▷ Press the button on the steering
Connecting a mobile phone wheel.
▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
General information Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
After the mobile phone is connected once to the select: "Accept"
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using ▷ Via touch screen: tap on the corresponding
iDrive and the steering wheel buttons. entry on the Control Display.
▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the
Connecting the mobile phone via direction of the Control Display.
Bluetooth
Via iDrive: Dialing a number
1. "COM" Via iDrive:
2. If necessary, select the following setting: 1. "COM"
"Telephone"
2. If necessary, "Telephone"
3. "Connect new phone"
3. "Dial number"
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
4. Enter the numbers.
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐ 5. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tooth device or a new device. tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐ Establish the connection via the additional
tooth name of the vehicle. phone:
5. Depending on the mobile device, a control

number is displayed or the control number 1. Press the button.
must be entered. 2. "Call via"
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control Apple CarPlay preparation
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device Concept
and on the Control Display. CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
ber on the device and via iDrive. and iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
22
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
activated on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following setting:
"Apple CarPlay"
6. Activate the function.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
23
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
Drive-ready state Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
Switching on drive-ready state The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐
1. Depress the brake pedal. cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the
2. Press the Start/Stop button. drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited.
Switching off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission:
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ Engaging selector lever position D,
hicle stopped. N, R
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐
gine off automatically while stationary to save
fuel. The engine starts automatically under the
following preconditions:
▷ Drive mode D.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ Neutral N.
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ R is reverse.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push
the selector lever in the desired direction, past a
resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐
Parking brake
turns to the center position in each case.
Setting To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you

select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure
Pull the switch. on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
The LED on the switch and the indicator
light in the instrument cluster are illuminated.
24
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent Steptronic transmission, Sport

shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐ program and manual mode
vertent shifting from selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Activate the Sport program/manual mode:

Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
Press the button. ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Engaging P
End the sport program/manual mode:
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary. Push the selector lever to the right.
High beams, headlight flasher,

turn signal
High beams, headlight flasher
Press button P.
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
25
Turn signal Symbol Function
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
Wiper system
in the opposite direction.
Switching the wipers on/off and
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
brief wipe
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ Switching on
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.

Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
Night vision. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
Lights off.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
26
Brief wipe and switching off Adjusting the sensitivity
Press the lever down. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position. Cleaning the windshield
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Rear window wiper
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Turn the outer switch upward.

▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
27
Clean the rear window Button Function

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
Seat and armrest heating.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its idle position when released. Climate control operation.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, Opening the Climate menu.
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to For example, for the following
its interval position when released. settings: upper body tempera‐
ture adjustment, parked-car ven‐
tilation.
Climate control
Automatic climate control Refueling
Button Function Refueling
Temperature.
Fuel cap
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
Maximum cooling.
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost and defog the wind‐ 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
shield. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Rear window defroster.
Gasoline
Active seat ventilation. For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
28
Wheels and tires Displaying the engine oil level

Via iDrive:
Tire inflation pressure specifications
1. "CAR"
The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the 2. "Vehicle status"
printed Owner's Manual. 3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
After correcting the tire inflation play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐
pressure tion to these messages.
With runflat tires:
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Adding engine oil
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
General information
The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
state before adding engine oil.
tings have been made.
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐ Adding
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
The friction during hard braking may produce played in the instrument cluster.
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐
sage.
ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐
ucts from BMW. Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Electronic oil measurement
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the com‐
bustion engine running.
29
Providing assistance Teleservices

Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Hazard warning flashers
Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
The button is located in the center console.
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance

Via iDrive:
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, select the entry for the Con‐
cierge Service.
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
30
31
CONTROLS Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. served.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Window safety switch 107 Unlocking
2 Power windows 106 Locking
3 Exterior mirror operation 122 5 Seating comfort features

4 Central locking system 88
32
Cockpit CONTROLS
Gentleman function 114 Cruise control: to store the speed

Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐
gested speed 238
Memory function 124
Pause or continue cruise control
Massage function 125
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐
tance
6 Opening and closing the tail‐
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
gate 98
tance
7 Steering column stalk, left Cruise control rocker switch
Turn signal 142
10 Instrument cluster 152
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
High beams, head‐
Selection lists 164
light flasher 143
High-beam Assistant 173
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Widgets in the instrument clus‐ Communication 6
ter 154 Voice activation system 48
Trip data 165
8 Shift paddle Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Communication 6
Speed Limiter 225
Thumbwheel for selection lists 164
12 Steering column stalk, right
Depending on the equipment:
Wipers 143
Cruise control on/off 227
Rain sensor 144

Cleaning the windshield 144
Active Cruise Control on/off 229
With steering and traffic jam assis‐
Rear window wiper in Canadian
tant 239:
models 145
Cruise control, distance control and
lane guidance on/off
33
CONTROLS Cockpit
Rear window wiper 145 Lights off

Daytime running lights 172
Clean the rear window 145 Parking lights 171
13 Horn, entire surface Automatic headlight control 170

Adaptive light functions 173
High-beam Assistant 173
14 Heated steering wheel 124
Low beams 171
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 123 Instrument lighting 176
16 Glove compartment 309 Right roadside parking light 171

17 Lights
Front fog lights 175 Left roadside parking light 171
Night Vision 197
18 Unlocking the hood 376
Light switch 170
34
Cockpit CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 43 9 Parking brake 139

2 Hazard warning system 391
Automatic Hold 140
Intelligent Safety 182
10 Driving Dynamics Control 137

3 Ventilation 284 SPORT driving mode
4 Glove compartment 308 COMFORT driving mode
5 Automatic climate control 279
6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for ECO PRO driving mode
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion 6
7 Controller with buttons 43 ADAPTIVE driving mode
8 Air suspension level adjust‐
ment 272
11 Switching drive-ready state on/
xOffroad driving mode 275 off 134
HDC Hill Descent Control 222
35
CONTROLS Cockpit
12 Auto Start/Stop function 134 Surround View: Panorama

View 254
PDC Park Distance Control 247 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

Without Surround View: rearview trol 219
camera 252
13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 146
Surround View 254
Cross traffic warning 268
Parking Assistant 262
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 393 4 Reading lights 176
2 Glass sunroof 108 5 Interior lights 176
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger

airbag 181
36
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle

Vehicle features and Safety information
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
It also describes features and functions that are Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ing.
to the selected options or country versions. This In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
served. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
General information ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one wheel chock.
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state. Warning
▷ Drive-ready state. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
Idle state following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Concept ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
off. All power consumers are deactivated. dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the outside and after exiting and locking. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state

The idle state is automatically established under
the following conditions:
37
CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes

place on the vehicle.
Standby state
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
Concept
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of When standby state is switched on, most func‐
the front doors is opened when exiting the tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle. Desired settings can be adjusted.
The idle state is not automatically established

while a phone call is active.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
Establishing idle state when doors are opened from the outside.
opening the front doors

Display in the instrument cluster
Via iDrive:
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
1. "CAR" ment cluster. The drivetrain is
2. "Settings" switched off and standby state
3. "Doors/Access" switched on.
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Manual idle state Drive-ready state

To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of
trip: Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
Safety information
Press and hold the button until
the OFF indicator on the instru‐
ment cluster goes out. DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
38
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
Gasoline engine
Warning Depending on the motorization, the full drive
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and power may not be available for approximately
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Display in the instrument cluster
against rolling away, follow the following: When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐
▷ Set the parking brake. ometer shows the current engine speed.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Switching off drive-ready state
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Steptronic transmission
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
wheel chock. hicle stopped.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
NOTICE
switches into standby state.
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Switching on drive-ready state
Concept
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
39
CONTROLS iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and Input and display
options Main menu
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ General information
The main menu is divided into two areas. The
left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
contains widgets that provide quick access to
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
certain functions.
served.
Operating concept
Concept
iDrive includes a large number of functions.
These functions can be operated via the Control‐
ler and, depending on the equipment version, via
Media/Radio
touchscreen, voice activation system or gesture
control. All functions of the entertainment system,
e.g., radio and TV stations, connection with ex‐
ternal devices and music collection.
Safety information
Communication
Warning Phone and message functions, e-mail and
Operating the integrated information systems calendar, and also the connection and manage‐
and communication devices while driving can ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only Navigation
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ Access to the navigation system, destination
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ views and other functions, such as Points of In‐
tionary. terest and areas to be avoided.
My Car
Information about vehicle status and trips.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and
also administration of driver profiles and range of
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
40
iDrive CONTROLS
Apps Activating/deactivating the

Management of apps, access to apps and ve‐ functions
hicle functions. Additional apps can be pur‐ Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
chased from the BMW Store. box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
Widgets menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐ Function is activated.
quently used functions. The configured widgets
Function is deactivated.
display dynamic contents such as the navigation
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.
Status information
Letters and numbers General information
Letters and numbers can be selected when the
The status field can be found in the upper area of
destination is entered, for example.
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
Letters and numbers can be entered using the played in the form of symbols.
Controller and, depending on the equipment ver‐
sion, via touchscreen or voice activation system. Radio symbols
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function Symbol Meaning
or Change between capital and HD Radio station is being received.

lower-case letters. Satellite radio is switched on.
Enter a blank space.
Telephone symbols
Switching between languages.
Use voice activation. Symbol Meaning
Confirm entry. Incoming or outgoing call.
Slide the input area to the left or Missed call.

right.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Entry comparison Network search.
When entering names and addresses, the choice Cellular network is not available.
is narrowed down with every letter and number
The critical charge state of the mo‐
and added automatically as needed.
bile phone has been reached.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle. Roaming is active.
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered Locating is active.
during entry for which data is available.
SMS text message received.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in Message received.
iDrive.
41
CONTROLS iDrive
Symbol Meaning Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Reminder.
Sending not possible. Overview
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
WiFi.
1 Programmable memory buttons
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning Storing a function

A function can be stored on a programmable
Check Control message.
memory button. A button with a stored function
The sound output has been can be overwritten with another function.
switched off. 1. Select function via iDrive.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion. 2. Press and hold the desired button
until the displayed bar on the Control Display
Checking the current vehicle posi‐ has loaded completely.
tion.
Driver profile. Executing a function

Messages. Press the button.
Service notifications. The function will work immediately. This means,

Information. for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Stop.
Data protection. Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
Programmable memory buttons
The button assignment is displayed at the top
General information edge of screen.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐

grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
42
iDrive CONTROLS
Deleting all button assignments Switching on/off automatically

All button assignments can be deleted. The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same
time. In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
2. "OK"
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Control Display and Switching on/off manually
Controller The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
Concept 1. Tip the Controller up.
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control
2. "Screen off"
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touch screen. Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Overview
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Controller
1 Control Display with touchscreen General information
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
Control Display menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
Safety information touchpad on the Controller.
Operation
NOTICE
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
ample.
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
43
CONTROLS iDrive
Button Function
Opens destination input menu for

navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu

Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐

plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting a menu
Selecting menu items

Buttons on the Controller 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Button Function
2. Press the Controller.
Opens the main menu.
Select a widget
Opens the Apps menu. 1. Move the Controller to the right.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is
Opens the Communication menu. selected.
Opens the Media/Radio menu. It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐
ment cluster.
44
iDrive CONTROLS
Adjusting the menu Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance
Adjusting widgets "Settings", a new display appears.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. ▷ Move the Controller to the left.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
The current display closes and the previous
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
display is shown.
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ Press the button.
Via iDrive:
The previous display re-opens.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. ▷ Move the Controller to the right.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
The new display opens.
justed.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
2. Tip the Controller up.
opened.
3. "Adjust main menu"
4. Select the desired adjustment: Opening the Options menu
▷ Add new widget: select symbol and Press the button.
select desired widget.
The requested widget will be inserted in The "Options" menu is displayed.
the relevant position. A maximum of four
The menu consists of various areas:
widgets can be displayed per page.
▷ Help for the selected menu, for instance
▷ Delete selected widget: select sym‐
"Help".
bol.
▷ System settings, for instance "Turn off
▷ Add new page: "Add page".
screen".
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page".
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select for instance for "Media/Radio".
widget.
5. "Done" Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
Adjusting menu contents
Via iDrive:
The display of menus "MEDIA", "COM" and
"NAV" can be adjusted, for instance to remove 1. "CAR"
the entries of functions that are not used from 2. "Settings"
the menu.
3. "Displays"
Via iDrive:
4. "Control display"
1. Select the menu. 5. "Brightness at night"
2. "Personalize menu" 6. Press the Controller.
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis‐ 7. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
played. displayed.
45
CONTROLS iDrive
Entering letters and numbers ▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
Input ▷ "Audio confirmation": pronounces entered
1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number. letters and numbers.
2. : confirm entry.
Entering letters and numbers
Deleting ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
Symbol Function ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
Press the Controller: delete letter or accents or periods so that the letter can be
number. clearly recognized.
▷ The set language determines what input is
Hold the Controller down: delete all possible. Where necessary, enter special
letters or numbers. characters via the Controller.
Using alphabetical lists Entering special characters

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐ Input Operation
played in a text box.
Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. ter. touchpad.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ space. center of the touchpad.
played in the list.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
per area of the touchpad.
Operation via touchpad
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the
General information score. lower area of the touchpad.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller. Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
Selecting functions via the touchpad.
Via iDrive: Function Operation
1. "CAR" Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
2. "Settings" rection.
3. "General settings" Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐
4. "Touchpad" map. pad with fingers.
5. Select the desired setting: Display menu. Tap once.
▷ "Character input": enter letters and num‐
bers.
▷ "Map": use the map.
46
iDrive CONTROLS
Operation via touchscreen ▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page".

▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of
General information widget.
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ 4. Tap "Done".
screen.
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch Showing/hiding the display bar
the screen with your fingers. Do not use any ob‐ At the top edge of the screen, it is possible to
jects. show or hide a display bar with additional func‐
tions.
Opening the main menu ▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐
Tap on the symbol. play bar at the top edge of the screen.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar
at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
The main menu is displayed.
▷ Tap arrow.
Adjusting widgets The new display opens.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ Changing settings
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments Settings such as brightness can be changed via
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ the touchscreen.
tionary. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. 2. "Settings"
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
3. "Displays"
justed.
2. Tap the symbol in the main menu.
5. "Brightness at night"
3. Select the desired adjustment:
6. To perform the desired setting:
▷ Add new widget: Tap symbol and se‐
lect desired widget. ▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of four ▷ , Tap on the symbol.
widgets can be displayed per page.
▷ Delete selected widget: Tap symbol.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".
47
CONTROLS iDrive
Entering letters and numbers the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent.
Input ▷ The system includes special microphones on
1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen. the driver side and the front passenger side.
A keyboard appears in the Control Display. ▷ ›...‹ denotes commands to use with the voice
2. Enter letters and numbers. activation system.
Deleting Functional requirements

▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐
Symbol Function ported by the voice activation system. To set
the language, refer to page 62.
Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐
ter or number. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
Tapping and holding the symbol all
letters: deletes all letters or numbers. Activating the voice activation
system
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved using the General information
touchscreen. There are various methods for activating the
Function Operation voice activation feature:
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ ▷ Press the button on the steering
rection. wheel.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ ▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
map. gers. wake word.
Display menu. Tap once. This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
vation system is active.
Then say the command. No other commands

Voice activation system may be available. In this case, operate the func‐
tion via iDrive.
Concept The voice activation can be terminated:
The voice activation system can be used to op‐
erate functions with spoken commands. The ▷ Press the button on the steering
system supports you with announcements dur‐ wheel again.
ing input. ▷ Say ›Cancel‹.
The voice control system and the feedback it
This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐
provides are not a substitute for the printed or
vation system is deactivated.
Integrated Owner's Manual.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
48
iDrive CONTROLS
Button on the steering wheel For the "Start recording" option, online
speech processing must be available and ac‐
1. Press the button on the steering tivated. Alternatively, the personal wake word
wheel. can be entered using the Controller.
2. Wait for the signal. 7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Say the command.
Wake word Possible commands
General information General information

Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐ Most contents on the Control Display can be
sonal wake word will start the system. spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐
tries. Speak these list entries out loud exactly as
Activating/deactivating they are shown in the list.
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal Say the commands and numbers with normal
wake word. volume, emphasis, and speed.
2. Say the command. The status of the voice recognition is displayed
in the upper area of the Control Display.
Preset wake word
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐
Function examples
vated and deactivated. The ›Hello BMW‹ option
Menu items
activates the preset and personal wake word.
The commands of the menu items are spoken
Via iDrive:
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 1. Press the button on the steering
3. "General settings" wheel.
4. "Language" 2. ›Media and radio‹
5. "Activation with "Hello BMW"" 3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the Control
Personal wake word Display.
In addition to a preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹, a
personal wake word can be set up. Navigation
Via iDrive: Destinations can be entered in the navigation
system using the voice activation system. It is
1. "CAR" also possible to say Points of Interest or have
2. "Settings" traffic reports announced.
3. "General settings" ▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road,
4. "Language" Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey‹.
5. "Personal wake word" ▷ ›Take me home‹.
6. "Start recording" ▷ ›Are there any traffic messages‹
49
CONTROLS iDrive
Communication Adjusting
For example, when a mobile phone is connected,
the voice activation system can be used to start Setting the language
calls or send SMS. The language to be used for voice activation and
▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone‹. system announcements can be set.
▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7‹. Via iDrive:
▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right 1. "CAR"
there‹.
2. "Settings"
Media and Radio 3. "General settings"
Most radio functions can be used via voice oper‐ 4. "Language"
ation. 5. "System language"
▷ ›Turn on music‹. 6. Select the desired language.
▷ ›Music off‹.
▷ ›Next title‹. Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
Climate control a short version.
Most climate control functions can be used via The short version of the voice dialog plays back
voice. short messages in abbreviated form.
▷ ›Activate climate control‹. Via iDrive:
▷ ›Deactivate ... air recirculation‹. 1. "CAR"
▷ ›Temperature [...] at ...‹. 2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
Help on the voice activation system
4. "Language"
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹. 5. "Response length"
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐ 6. Select the desired setting.

ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹. Speaking during voice output
▷ To have help for the current menu read out It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
loud: ›Help‹. voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
Information for Emergency rupted, for instance due to background noise or
talking.
Requests
Via iDrive:
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, 1. "CAR"
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can 2. "Settings"
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection. 3. "General settings"
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 393, 4. "Language"

close to the interior mirror. 5. "Speaking during voice output"
50
iDrive CONTROLS
Online speech processing Activate voice command response on the smart‐

Online speech processing provides a dictation phone for this purpose.
function, a natural method of entering destina‐
tions and improves the quality of voice recogni‐ 1. Press and hold the button on the
tion. To use the functions, data is transmitted to steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
a service provider via an encrypted connection Voice command response is activated on the
and stored locally there. smartphone.
Via iDrive:
2. Release the button.
1. "CAR"
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
2. "Settings"
pears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice command
4. "Language" response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
5. "Online speech processing" on the Control Display.
Adjusting the volume Amazon Alexa Car Integration

Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set. Concept
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐ Alexa is a digital assistant by Amazon. With Ama‐
ume of other audio sources is changed. zon Alexa Car Integration, Alexa can be used in
the vehicle.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
General information
System limits Some of the Alexa functions are limited in the ve‐
hicle to prevent any impairment of safety while
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead
driving.
to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and
glass sunroof closed.
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear
▷ Amazon Alexa Car Integration purchased via
seat bench can impair the system. Avoid
ConnectedDrive Store.
making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking. ▷ The ConnectedDrive account in the vehicle is
the same as in the BMW Connected app.
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems
with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud ▷ The vehicle is connected in the BMW Con‐
and clear. nected app.
▷ Amazon account and BMW account are con‐
Using the voice activation nected in the BMW Connected app.
system of the smartphone ▷ The Bluetooth connection or USB connec‐
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be tion between the vehicle and the mobile de‐
used via voice activation. vice is active.
51
CONTROLS iDrive
Activation in the BMW Connected The personal assistant is connected to other dig‐
app ital services such as the Concierge service and is
continually being developed. The full scope re‐
The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
quires an active driver profile.
the BMW Connected app.
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is availa‐
Follow the instructions in the app.
ble in two variants:
Activation in the vehicle ▷ In the Guest profile: the variant is linked to a

vehicle and cannot be personalized. Not all
An authorization for the use of Amazon Alexa Car
described functions are available to the full
Integration is required every time before starting
extent.
a trip.
▷ With active Driver profile: the variant can be
1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integration: used and personalized in different vehicles.
▷ Pair mobile device with the vehicle via All described functions are available to the full
Bluetooth. extent.
▷ Select driver profile, refer to page 66.
2. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desired com‐
Functional requirement
mand. Activate the following settings to access the full
range of functions:
Information about the active function is dis‐
played on the Control Display. ▷ The Driver profile is activated.
▷ The ConnectedDrive Service has been re‐
Malfunction quested at a service partner or was pur‐
In case of a malfunction, switch off the engine chased via the ConnectedDrive Store.
and start the engine again. ▷ Registered in the ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ "Online speech processing" is activated.
BMW Intelligent Personal ▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under

"Personalization" in the data protection menu
Assistant is activated.
▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive" in
Concept the data protection menu are activated.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is the per‐
sonal assistant that expands the voice activation Example for function
function to include additional functions that im‐ 1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
prove interaction in the vehicle. wake word.
2. ›Is my engine oil level still OK?‹
General information The personal assistant provides information
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is available about the engine oil level.
depending on the national-market version. The
use of the personal assistant is based on voice
operation. The voice operation is enhanced with
personal recommendations and messages as
well as the automation of routines.
52
iDrive CONTROLS
Adjusting Functions
Situational adaptation Experience Modes

Depending on the situation, different conditions The Experience Modes combine different vehi‐
can be activated. cle functions in the car's interior. For example,
the selection of a mode harmonizes the ambient
Condition Description
light and seat climate control.
"Do not disturb" Incoming calls and some
messages are not displayed. Selecting a mode
1. "CAR"
"Deactivate Routines are no longer
learning" learned. 2. "Experience Modes"
3. Select the desired mode.
"Passenger on Personalized variant only:
board" private contents, e.g., e-
Deactivating
mails, are not displayed.
1. "CAR"
Activating/deactivating 2. "Experience Modes"
1. "APPS" 3. "END MODE"
2. "Installed apps"
Adjusting the mode
3. "Personal assistant"
1. "CAR"
4. "Situational adjustment"
2. "Experience Modes"
5. Select the desired setting.
3. Select the desired mode.
Automating routines 4. "SETTINGS"
5. Make the desired setting.
General information
The personal assistant can learn routines, e.g., Caring Car
the automatic activation of the heated steering
wheel from a specific external temperature. General information
Rules are created for this purpose, which can be Different vehicle functions in the car's interior are
activated and deactivated at any time. harmonized in a short-term program. A program
takes 3 minutes.
Creating a rule
1. "APPS" Activating/deactivating
2. "Installed apps" 1. "CAR"
3. "Personal assistant" 2. "Caring Car"
4. "Automate habits" 3. Select the desired channel.
5. Select the desired setting. The program can be stopped prematurely:
"End program"
53
CONTROLS iDrive
Connected Command Owner's Manual is displayed on the Control Dis‐

play.
General information
Connected Command enables passengers to
control different functions in the vehicle via
BMW Gesture Control
smartphone and the BMW Connected App and
receive information about the trip. Concept
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand
Functional requirements motion using BMW Gesture Control.
▷ The smartphone is connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth and WiFi. Overview
▷ The Connected app is installed on the smart‐
phone.
Managing rights
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Select the desired setting for the respective
device.
Owner's Manual via voice operation The camera in the roofliner detects gestures that
are carried out in the area of the center console
Concept at the height of the Control Display.
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
functions and the operation of the vehicle. Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
General information
1. "CAR"
The voice control system and the feedback it
provides are not a substitute for the printed or 2. "Settings"
Integrated Owner's Manual. The voice recogni‐ 3. "General settings"
tion and quality of the feedback may vary. 4. "Gesture control"
The system supports questions that begin with 5. "Gesture control"
How or What.
Adjusting
Example for function
Via iDrive:
1. Press the button on the steering 1. "CAR"
wheel.
2. "Settings"
2. ›How can the passenger airbag be
deactivated?‹
4. "Gesture control"
The voice activation system returns a feedback.
When stationary, the section of the integrated 5. Select the desired setting:
54
iDrive CONTROLS
▷ "User help display": the possible gesture Execute gestures clearly.

is shown on the Control Display. The gestures can also be executed from the
▷ "Audio confirmation": an acoustic signal is front-passenger side.
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
Carrying out gestures

Perform gestures underneath the interior mirror
and next to the steering wheel.
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in Accept call.

the direction of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a list dur‐
ing voice activation.
Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Reject call.

Display in the direction of the front-passen‐ Close pop-up.
ger side.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular The volume is increased.

pattern with the index finger stretched out
forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular mo‐
tion.
Slowly move hand counterclockwise with The volume is reduced.

the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular mo‐
tion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and Surround View: turn camera view.
move hand horizontally to the right or left. This gesture can only be executed
while the vehicle is stationary.
55
CONTROLS iDrive
Gesture Operation Function
Move stretched out index and middle finger Individually assignable gesture.
forward. Possible functions:
Mute.
Control Display on/off
Voice command response.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left Reverse Skip function.
back and forth. The previous music track is played.
Move fist with thumb extended to right left Forward Skip function.
back and forth. The next music track is played.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and Individually assignable gesture.
stretch five fingers out again. Possible functions:
Destination guidance to home address.
Notifications.
Last calls.
Assigning gesture individually ▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 401.
Via iDrive:
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
1. "CAR" tection range.
2. "Settings" ▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
3. "General settings" ▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or
"Function assignment gesture 2"
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera in the roof‐
liner can be disturbed by the following circum‐
stances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
56
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and ▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐
tion.
options
Validity of the Owner's Manual
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. Production of the vehicle
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
tems. When using these functions and systems, After a software update in the
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ vehicle
served. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
BMW Remote Software information.
Upgrade
Concept The use of the Remote Software Upgrade re‐
quires an active ConnectedDrive contract.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐
date the software of the vehicle. Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade makes new functions, functional
Information about the version
enhancements or quality improvements availa‐
ble. General information
The information about the version contains a de‐
General information scription of the updates that are included in the
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download
BMW recommends performing the Remote
and after the installation has been completed
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐
successfully, the information about the version
ble.
can be displayed on the Control Display. The in‐
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade formation is available in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
is automatically loaded into the vehicle. tomer portal at any time.
For reasons of safety, the loaded upgrade can Logging on to the ConnectedDrive customer
only be installed when the vehicle is stationary. portal on the Internet under: www.bmw-connec‐
The installation is not installed until it was con‐ teddrive.com.
firmed on the vehicle.
▷ The installation may take around 20 minutes.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐
lation.
57
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Displaying information about the Automatic download

version The available data for Remote Software Upgrade
Via iDrive: is automatically loaded into the vehicle. The
download does not require an approval.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Via iDrive
3. "General settings" 1. "CAR"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 2. "Settings"
5. "Installed version:" 3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
Safety information
5. "Search for upgrades"
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
Warning play.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Via BMW Connected app
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the 1. Download the available upgrade to the smart‐
following actions: phone in the BMW Connected app.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Con‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake. nected app.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ 3. Establish a simultaneous WiFi and Bluetooth
dows. connection between the smartphone and the
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. vehicle.
▷ Using vehicle equipment. The data transfer of the upgrade from the
smartphone to the vehicle occurs only while
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
driving.
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
ing and lock the vehicle. play.
Install the upgrade

Search for and download of an
upgrade General information
After successful download completion, installa‐
General information tion is offered once the vehicle is parked. The in‐
There are various options to search for and stallation can be carried out immediately follow‐
download an upgrade: ing the download or at a later time.
▷ Automatic. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
▷ Via iDrive. After the successful completion of the upgrade,
booked services, for example RTTI, will be reacti‐
▷ Via BMW Connected app.
vated automatically while driving.
58
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Functional requirements Functional limitations

▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
▷ The external temperature is above temporarily unavailable, for instance:
14 ℉/-10 ℃. ▷ Hazard warning system.
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. ▷ Central locking system.
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off. ▷ Parking lights.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged. ▷ Horn.
▷ Engine is sufficiently cooled down. ▷ Alarm system.
▷ Automatic engine start for stationary climate ▷ Emergency Request.
control is not activated via iDrive. ▷ Power windows.
▷ Glass sunroof.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road. The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that an error message can be sent, for in‐
stance if the installation is terminated. Malfunction
▷ Close the windows. In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐
▷ Close the glass sunroof.
nected app.
▷ Close the tailgate.
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
a mobile phone. ice center or repair shop.
▷ Unhitch any trailer or load carrier.
▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle at the start of
the installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
Additional vehicle related functional require‐
ments are shown on the Control Display.
Install the upgrade later

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
59
CONTROLS General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and Retrieving messages
options Via iDrive:
1. Tip the Controller up.

This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 2. "Notifications"
3. Select the desired message.
to the selected options or country versions. This Deleting messages
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ All messages, except Check Control messages
tems. When using these functions and systems, or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ be deleted from the list.
served. Check Control messages or messages from the
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Messages
Via iDrive:
Concept 1. Tip the Controller up.
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐ 2. "Notifications"

ing in the vehicle in list form. 3. Select desired message, for instance. SMS.
General information 4. Press the button.

The following messages can be displayed: 5. ▷ "Delete this notification"
▷ Traffic messages. ▷ "Delete all notifications"
▷ Check Control messages.
Adjusting
▷ Messages on service notifications.
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders. ▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service
or the BMW Connected app. ▷ All messages or a limited time period for re‐
ceived messages.
▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
Via iDrive:
The number of messages is additionally dis‐
played in the status field. 1. Tip the Controller up.
The Messages menu can also be created as 2. "Notifications"
Widget. 3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
60
General settings CONTROLS
Time Automatic time setting

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
Setting the time zone
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
4. "Date and time"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:"
5. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
rently used.
Setting the time Date

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Setting the date

2. "Settings" Via iDrive:
3. "General settings" 1. "CAR"
4. "Date and time" 2. "Settings"
5. "Time:" 3. "General settings"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are 4. "Date and time"
displayed. 5. "Date:"
7. Press the Controller. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes displayed.
are displayed. 7. Press the Controller.
9. "OK" 8. Make the settings for the month and year.
9. "OK"
Setting the time format
Via iDrive: Setting the date format
1. "CAR" Via iDrive:
2. "Settings" 1. "CAR"
3. "General settings" 2. "Settings"
4. "Date and time" 3. "General settings"
5. "Time format:" 4. "Date and time"
6. Select the desired setting. 5. "Date format:"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 6. Select the desired setting.
rently used.
61

rently used.
Trip data settings
Concept
Language The intervals in which the trip data will be reset
can be configured.
Setting the language
Via iDrive: Resetting trip data
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 1. "CAR"
3. "General settings" 2. "Settings"
4. "Language:" 3. "General settings"
5. "System language" 4. "Reset trip data"
6. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting.

rently used. Speed warning
Setting the voice dialog
Concept
For voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 50. A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
Setting the units of General information

measurement The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the country version, you can set
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐ Adjusting
ture. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive: 1. "CAR"
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
2. "Settings" 3. "General settings"
3. "General settings" 4. "Speed warning"
4. "Units" 5. "Warning at:"
5. Select the desired menu item. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
6. Select the desired setting. displayed.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 7. Press the Controller.
rently used.
62
General settings CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating System limits

Via iDrive: The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
1. "CAR"
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
2. "Settings"
by the steering wheel rim.
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
4. "Speed warning" able sunglasses.
5. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as Activating/deactivating

the speed warning popup windows
Via iDrive:
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
1. "CAR" played automatically on the Control Display.
2. "Settings" Some of these popup windows can be activated
3. "General settings" or deactivated.
4. "Speed warning" Via iDrive:
5. "Select current speed" 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
Driver Attention Camera 3. "General settings"

4. "Pop-ups"
Concept
A camera that monitors driver activity is located
rently used.
in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates
the head position and eye opening and uses the
data to analyze the attention of the driver. This
system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐
Activating/deactivating the
tems, e.g.: display of the current
▷ Fatigue alert. vehicle position
▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with Ex‐
tended Traffic Jam Assistant. Concept
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current
Activating/deactivating vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Via iDrive: Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
1. "CAR" tomer portal.
2. "Settings"
Via iDrive:
4. "Driver Attention Camera"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
63
3. "General settings" these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive

4. "Data privacy" account.
5. "Configure services"
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
5. "Brightness at night"
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Resetting the vehicle

configuration
All individual settings can be reset to the factory
settings when the drive-ready state is switched
off.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
When the stored settings in a driver profile are
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,
64
Personal settings CONTROLS
Personal settings
Vehicle features and Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
options
Concept
cific and optional features offered with the series. Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
It also describes features and functions that are sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due personal data can be permanently deleted using
to the selected options or country versions. This iDrive.
tems. When using these functions and systems, General information
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
served. lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
Data protection ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
Data transfer ▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music hard disk.
Concept ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
The vehicle offers different services, whose use ▷ Phone book.
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some services. ▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
General information Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
When the data transfer is deactivated, the re‐ to 15 minutes.
spective service cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary. Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Adjusting
The data transfer can be configured in different Deleting data
stages or individually for separate services. The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
Via iDrive: when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.
For resetting the vehicle to factory settings, refer
1. "CAR"
to page 64.
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
65
CONTROLS Personal settings
Driver profiles This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐

ited period of time.
As soon as the engine is started or any button is
Concept pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple Setup assistant
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐
a limited period of time on the Welcome screen
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in
to configure the most important settings for the
the driver profile.
vehicle.
General information "Getting started" Select to start the set-up assis‐

tant.
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive at
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be any time.
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐ 1. "CAR"
lected. 2. "Settings"
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically 3. "General settings"
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest
4. "Getting started"
profile.
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐
The recognition via vehicle key and a digital key
lowing functions:
can be assigned to a driver profile so that the ve‐
hicle will apply the settings as soon as the driver ▷ Setting the system language.
unlocks the car. As soon as the vehicle detects ▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
the vehicle key or the digital key, the correspond‐ If the set-up assistant was opened in the
ing driver profile will be activated. guest profile: create driver profile.
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored ▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with
▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an al‐
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is
ready defined driver profile: set up personal
thereby possible to use these settings in other
assistant.
BMW vehicles as well.
▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant
Functional requirements was opened from an already defined driver
profile or a guest profile: set up services or
When switching the driver profile, the vehicle confirm the explanation for the transmission
must move at a maximum of walking speed. of vehicle related data.
▷ Set up other methods for use.
Welcome screen
The selected settings are stored in the active
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐
driver's profile.
come screen will be displayed.
The following actions can be carried out on the Guest profile
Welcome screen:
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
▷ Switching the driver profile. Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest
▷ Starting the set-up assistant. profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.
66
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐ the driver profile can continue with the access
matically active: data of the created ConnectedDrive account.
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ Selecting recognition
hicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle. The settings for the recognition are entered via
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the iDrive:
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐ 1. "CAR"
cle.
2. "Driver profiles"
The following limitations apply:
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to image can be tapped in the top status bar.
the guest profile.
4. "Driver recognition"
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest
5. Select the desired setting:
profile.
▷ "with vehicle key"
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐ The vehicle key that is recognized in the
count. car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected,
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
the unintended vehicle keys must be re‐
screen or via iDrive:
moved from the car’s interior.
1. "CAR" ▷ "With Digital Key"
2. "Driver profiles" The digital key that is recognized in the
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
image can be tapped in the top status bar. file. If multiple digital keys are detected,
3. "Guest" the unintended digital keys must be re‐
moved from the car’s interior.
4. "OK"
6. "Activate linkage"
Creating a driver profile As soon as the vehicle detects the vehicle key or
the digital key, the corresponding driver profile
A driver profile is created or via iDrive:
will be activated. If the vehicle key or the smart‐
1. "CAR" phone with the digital key is not carried with you
2. "Driver profiles" or the vehicle key or digital key is not recognized,
the driver profile can only be selected on the
3. Move the Controller to the right. Welcome screen when a PIN has been set up.
image can be tapped in the top status bar. Setting up a PIN
4. "Add driver profile" A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐
ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐ vated without vehicle key and without digital key.
tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver In this case, a PIN can be set up to activate the
profile. If a ConnectedDrive account has not yet driver profile.
been created, the account can be created via a Non-ConnectedDrive countries: If a PIN was not
smartphone. A QR code will be displayed on the set up or the PIN is not known, the driver's profile
Control Display for this purpose. The creation of cannot be activated.
67
CONTROLS Personal settings
ConnectedDrive countries: If a PIN was not set Selecting a driver profile

up or the PIN is not known, the driver's profile
Depending on the recognition setting, the driver
can be activated with the access data of the cor‐
profile will be selected automatically.
responding ConnectedDrive account.
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will
Via iDrive:
be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive:
1. "CAR" A PIN may have to be entered.
2. "Driver profiles" 1. "CAR"
3. Move the Controller to the right. 2. "Driver profiles"
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar. image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Driver recognition" 3. Select driver profile.
5. "using PIN" 4. "OK"
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
Changing/canceling the are automatically applied.
recognition function
When another vehicle key or another digital key Switching synchronization with
is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐ the ConnectedDrive account
ment must be canceled first. on/off
Via iDrive: ConnectedDrive countries:
1. "CAR" The settings stored in the driver's profile are
2. "Driver profiles" synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive
account. This means that it is possible to use the
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile ConnectedDrive access as well, if this function is
image can be tapped in the top status bar. supported.
4. "Driver recognition" The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
5. "with vehicle key" account is enabled when a driver profile is cre‐
or ated or via iDrive:
"With Digital Key" 1. "CAR"

6. "Activate linkage" 2. "Driver profiles"
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be handed 3. Move the Controller to the right.
over, such as for maintenance, carry out the fol‐ As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
lowing steps first: image can be tapped in the top status bar.
▷ Setting up PIN. 4. "Settings"
▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key. 5. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Switching to the guest profile. 6. "Synchronize driver profile"
The handed over vehicle key can then no longer
be used to access the personal driver profile. Renaming a driver profile
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐
ble:
68
The name that was assigned when the driver ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile
profile was set up can be changed via iDrive: was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
1. "CAR"
count will be retained.
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile System limits
image can be tapped in the top status bar. A clear detection of the desired vehicle key may
3. Select driver profile. not be possible in the following cases, e.g.:
4. "Settings" ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
5. Enter a profile name. Access.
6. Select the symbol. ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
Selecting a profile picture ▷ When multiple vehicle keys are located out‐
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: side on the driver's side of the vehicle.
The profile image is transferred from the Con‐ ConnectedDrive countries:

nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW Con‐ A driver profile can only be created and
nected app. synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐ when cellular network reception is available.
ble: The use of personal settings that are stored in
Via iDrive: the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is
subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐
1. "CAR" tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐
2. "Driver profiles" able, or available in a non-compatible version, in
other vehicles.
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Avatar"
5. Select the desired profile picture.
Deleting the driver profile

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Settings"
5. "Remove driver profile"
6. Select the desired driver profile.
7. "Delete now"
69
CONTROLS Connections
Connections
Vehicle features and Function Connec‐
tion type
options
USB storage device: USB.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Playing music.
It also describes features and functions that are Playing videos from the smart‐ USB.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due phone or the USB storage de‐
to the selected options or country versions. This vice.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ WiFi hotspot
tems. When using these functions and systems, cess. via WiFi.
served. Using Apple CarPlay apps via Bluetooth
iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring: WiFi.

Connecting mobile devices
Showing the smartphone display
to the vehicle on the Control Display.
Concept The following connection types require one-time

Various connection types are available for using pairing with the vehicle:
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection ▷ Bluetooth.
type to select depends on the mobile device and ▷ WiFi hotspot.
the desired function.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
General information ▷ Screen Mirroring.
The following overview shows possible functions Paired devices are automatically recognized later
and the suitable connection types for them. The on and connected to the vehicle.
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice. Safety information
Function Connec‐
tion type Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth.
and communication devices while driving can
system.
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
Using phone functions via iDrive of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
or touchscreen. use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
SMS. systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or
phone or the audio player. USB.
70
Connections CONTROLS
Compatible devices Switching on Bluetooth

Via iDrive:
General information
1. "COM"
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ 2. "Mobile devices"
bluetooth. 3. Move the Controller to the right.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed 4. "Settings"
or deviating software versions. 5. "Bluetooth®"
6. Select setting.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
telephone functions
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers To use all supported functions of a mobile
can be displayed in the vehicle. phone, activate the desired functions in the vehi‐
cle prior to pairing the mobile phone with the ve‐
Via iDrive:
hicle as needed.
1. "COM" Via iDrive:
2. "Mobile devices"
1. "COM"
2. "Personalize menu"
4. "Settings"
3. Select the desired settings, for instance"Text
5. "Bluetooth® info" messages".
6. "System information"
Pairing the mobile device with
the vehicle
Bluetooth connection Via iDrive:
Functional requirements 1. "COM"
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 71, with 2. "Mobile devices"

Bluetooth interface. 3. Move the Controller to the right.
▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in the 4. "New device"
vehicle. 5. "Phone calls and audio"
▷ The device is ready for operation. The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and the Control Display.
on the device. 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
Control Display. A control number is displayed.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may 7. Compare the control number displayed on
be required on the device; refer to the own‐ the Control Display with the control number
er's manual of the device.
71
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
firm that the two match. phone function.
8. Select Bluetooth connection if necessary: Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
"Use BMW iDrive for phone calls, Bluetooth® played or why are they incomplete?
audio, and apps." ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle not yet complete.
and displayed in the device list. ▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
Frequently Asked Questions transmitted.
All requirements are met and all required steps ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
were completed in the specified order. Despite entries with special characters.
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
pected. from social networks.
In this case, the following explanations can help: ▷ The number of phone book entries to be
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or transmitted is too high.
connected? ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ stance due to stored information such as
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. notes.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections Reduce the data volume of the contact.
with other devices. ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐ audio source or as telephone.
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new Configure the mobile phone and connect it
device search. with the telephone function.
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same ▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the
function are paired. phone after the last synchronization.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or Synchronize contacts again: "Reload
has only a limited remaining battery life. contacts"
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the How can the phone connection quality be im‐
power-save mode where required. proved?
Why does the mobile phone no longer react? ▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not the mobile phone, depending on the mobile
function anymore. phone.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again. ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for charging tray.
mobile phone operation. ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme rately in the sound settings.
ambient temperatures. If all points in this list have been checked and the
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive? required function is still not available, contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
▷ Phone functions are not configured for the
fied service center or repair shop.
mobile phone.
72
USB connection ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is

being used, settings may be required on the
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
General information manual of the device.
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to Not compatible USB media:
the USB interface. ▷ USB hard drives.
▷ Mobile phones. ▷ USB hubs.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
▷ USB storage devices. ▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐ Functional requirement
plied with charge current via the USB interface if
Compatible device, refer to page 71, with USB
the device supports this. Follow the maximum
interface.
charge current of the USB interface.
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐
Connecting the device
ces with data transfer:
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
▷ Playing music files.
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
▷ Playing videos. page 303.
Follow the following when connecting: The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ vice list.
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
WiFi hotspot
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐
Concept
vices available on the market, it cannot be Compatible devices with WiFi interface can use
guaranteed that every device is operable on the Internet connection of the vehicle via the
the vehicle. WiFi hotspot.
▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐
treme environmental conditions, such as very General information
high temperatures; refer to the owner's Up to 10 devices can be connected to the
manual of the device. WiFi hotspot simultaneously.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored Functional requirements
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐ ▷ Compatible device, refer to page 71, with ac‐
anteed in all cases. tivated WiFi interface.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored ▷ WiFi is activated on the vehicle.
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface. ▷ Registration and data contract with a service
provider where required.
73
▷ Standby state is switched on. Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
Connecting a device to the
2. "Mobile devices"
Internet via the WiFi hotspot
Using the Internet for the first time via the
WiFi hotspot requires registration and possibly a 4. "Settings"
data volume purchase from a service provider. 5. "Internet connection"
Depending on the country version, data volume 6. Select the desired setting.
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Via iDrive: Apple CarPlay preparation
1. "COM"
Concept
2. "Mobile devices"
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
3. Move the Controller to the right. Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
4. "New device" and iDrive.
5. "Internet, apps"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ Functional requirements
played on the Control Display. ▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 71.
6. Activate Internet usage via WiFi if necessary. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
"Open settings" ▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
7. Activate Internet usage. ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
"Internet connection" activated on the iPhone.
8. Move the Controller to the left. ▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple
CarPlay preparation.
9. Search for WiFi networks on the mobile de‐
vice. Select network name on the device.
Switching on Bluetooth and
10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
CarPlay
Via iDrive:
The device is displayed in the device list.
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the 1. "COM"
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can 2. "Mobile devices"
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐ 3. Move the Controller to the right.
spot.
4. "Settings"
All devices connected via the hotspot use this
data volume. 5. Select the following setting:
"Apple CarPlay"
Deactivating Internet usage via 6. Activate the function.
the WiFi hotspot
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for instance.
74
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
Via iDrive: If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
1. "COM" hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐
2. "Mobile devices" fied service center or repair shop.
4. "New device"
Screen Mirroring
5. "Phone calls and audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on General information
the Control Display.
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. play.
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number displayed on Functional requirements
the Control Display with the control number ▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 71,
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ with Screen Mirroring interface.
firm that the two match.
▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
8. Select CarPlay: smartphone.
"Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay" ▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list. Activate WiFi in the vehicle
Via iDrive:
Operation
1. "COM"
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ 2. "Mobile devices"
gation, Entertainment, Communication. 3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Frequently Asked Questions 5. "Wi-Fi®"
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite Pairing a smartphone with
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
Screen Mirroring
Via iDrive:
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple 1. "COM"
CarPlay. When a new connection is established, 2. "Mobile devices"
CarPlay can no longer be selected. 3. Move the Controller to the right.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device 4. "New device"
list.
5. "Screen Mirroring"
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored connections under The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on
Bluetooth and under WiFi. the Control Display.
75
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surroundings Symbol Meaning

of the smartphone.
Telephone.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the
device display. Select the WiFi name of the Bluetooth audio.
vehicle.
WiFi hotspot.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the Apple CarPlay.
device list. Screen Mirroring.
Managing mobile devices Configuring the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
General information
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
vice that is already connected and the device will
standby state is switched on.
be disconnected. Follow the information on the
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the Control Display.
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
Via iDrive:
detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐
cle and can be used via iDrive. 1. "COM"
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐ 2. "Mobile devices"
sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐
3. Select the desired device.
er's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list ▷ "Disconnect device"
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐ The device remains paired and can be
cle are displayed in the device list. connected again.
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to ▷ "Connect device"
the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of 10 The functions that were assigned to the
devices can be connected to the vehicle via WiFi. device before disconnecting are assigned
A maximum of 20 devices will be detected. to the device when it is reconnected. The
Via iDrive: functions may be deactivated on a device
already connected.
1. "COM"
▷ "Delete device"
2. "Mobile devices"
The device is disconnected and removed
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is from the device list.
used. When the icon is displayed in white, this
function is actively connected to the vehicle. The
Priority of the phones
icon is displayed in gray when the function of the
device is inactive. When two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, you can specify the priority of the mobile
phones for reconnection.
76
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
7. Turn the controller to select the priority for
the selected mobile phone.
Select the desired priority by sliding.
77
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
cific and optional features offered with the series. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
It also describes features and functions that are this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
to the selected options or country versions. This vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ opened from the outside.
served.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
Vehicle key inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
General information
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle the vehicle from the outside when there are
is delivered with two vehicle keys or one vehicle people in it.
key and the BMW display key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery.
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ Warning
sion, various settings can be configured for the Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
button functions. can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
A driver profile with personal settings can be as‐ themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
signed to a vehicle key. following actions:
To provide information on maintenance require‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
ments, the service data is stored in the vehicle ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
key.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, dows.
take the vehicle key with you when exiting the
vehicle.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
78
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle

key, this driver profile will be activated and the
settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
1 Unlocking switched off.
2 Locking After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
Stationary climate control through Remote is ready for operation.
Engine Start 290 The light functions may depend on the ambient
3 To open the tailgate brightness.
succession: panic mode Convenient opening
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key after unlocking.
Unlocking The windows and the glass sunroof with sun

protection are opened, as long as the button on
General information the vehicle key is pressed.
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐
ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ Locking
tings:
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap General information
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. The behavior of the vehicle during locking using
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed the vehicle key depends on the following set‐
with a light signal or a sound signal. tings:
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
vehicle is being unlocked. a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
Unlocking the vehicle in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
Press the button on the vehicle key. warning flashers are switched on.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature is acti‐
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and
vated during locking.
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle
Locking the vehicle
access points.
1. Close the driver's door.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
79
The following functions are executed: ▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap ing, refer to page 172, will be switched on.
are locked. The light functions may depend on the ambient
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be brightness.
switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when Tailgate
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be General information
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
With Comfort Access: The following settings are available for the opera‐
convenient closing tion of the tailgate with the vehicle key:
▷ Whether the vehicle key opens only the up‐
Safety information per tailgate or the upper and lower tailgate at
the same time.
Warning ▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked
when the tailgate is opened with the vehicle
With convenient closing, body parts can be
key.
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear When the trailer power socket is in use, the tail‐
during convenient closing. gate cannot be opened with the vehicle key.
Safety information
Closing
Press and hold the button on the vehicle Warning
key in the area close to the vehicle after
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
locking.
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
protection are closed, as long as the button on during opening and closing.
the vehicle key is pressed.
Switching on the interior and Warning

exterior lights The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Press the button on the vehicle key with
Make sure that the area of movement of the
the vehicle locked.
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐
onds after locking.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. For switch‐
ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 176.
80
cover with a lever movement of the

NOTICE integrated key, arrow 2.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key for approx. 1 second. 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.

4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
5. Press the cover closed.
on
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ until the integrated key engages.
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
It is possible to adjust the duration of the head‐ er’s service center or another qualified
light courtesy delay feature, refer to page 172. service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle Additional vehicle keys
key, refer to page 87.
Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ ice center or another qualified service center or
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
81
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver pro‐ Switching the drive-ready state on
file, the connection to this vehicle key must be via emergency detection of the
deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned vehicle key
to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
transmission towers or other equipment with state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
high transmitting power. Proceed as follows in this case:
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ 1. Hold the back of the vehicle key against the
jects. marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
Do not transport the vehicle key together with tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
metal objects. ter.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ 2. If the vehicle key is detected:
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
rect proximity to the vehicle key. onds.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
electronic devices. change the position of the vehicle key and repeat
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ the procedure.
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone. Frequently Asked Questions
▷ The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the What precautions can be taken to be able to
wireless charging tray. open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐
Place the vehicle key in a different location. hicle key?
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
unlocked and locked from the outside with the ices of the BMW Connected app include the
integrated key, refer to page 87. ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
82
BMW display key Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
General information the vehicle from the outside when there are
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐ people in it.
tional mechanical key. If the display key is used,
the mechanical key should be carried with you,
for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is Warning
used like the integrated key, refer to page 87.
The display key supports all functions of the can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
standard vehicle key. themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐ following actions:
able: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Display status of doors and windows. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning sys‐ ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
tem. dows.
▷ Display service information. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Call up range with available fuel. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-car There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
heating. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
Without parked-car heating: operate parked- hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
car ventilation. ing and lock the vehicle.
▷ Stationary climate control through Remote
Engine Start
Overview
▷ Level setting of the vehicle when stationary.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be 1 To open the tailgate
opened from the outside.
2 Unlocking
succession: panic mode
Warning
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
inside is only possible with special knowledge. 4 Locking
5 Display
83
6 Back If the information area contains more than one

page, then page indicators are shown beneath
7 Switch the display on/off
the information.
8 Micro-USB charging socket
A solid indicator denotes the current
page.
Reception range Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change
The number of available display key functions between the pages.
depends on the distance from the vehicle. If further information is available on a page, tap
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐ the appropriate symbol.
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐ To return to the original page: tap on the
ble. symbol beneath the display.
▷ The status information can be called up in the
extended reception range. Lower status line
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐ The lower status line indicates whether or not
ing can be operated. the display key is within reception range.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car ▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
ventilation can be operated. tion range.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle, ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
you can display the last transmitted status in‐ ception range. It indicates when the last data
formation from the vehicle. transfer from the vehicle took place.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception Switching on/off
range. The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
Display To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
General information key.
The display is divided into the upper status line, To show the display:
the information area, and the lower status line.
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
Upper status line play key.
The upper status line displays the following infor‐ 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
mation: top to unlock the screen lock.
▷ / Vehicle secured/vehicle unsecured. To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the display key battery. 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
Information area the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
The information area can be used to access in‐ 3. "OK"
formation and perform additional functions. To switch the display on:
84
Press the button on the left side of the display ▷ If the charge state of the display key battery
key. declines, the display is switched off automati‐
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
Operating concept the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
The following information shows how to access
until the battery is completely discharged.
the information and functions using the main
menus. ▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time
Main menu Information/Function or if the key has not been used for an ex‐
"Security / tended period.
information" Door status. ▷ The display key can be used while it is being
charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully
Alarm system status.
discharged, it may take some time before the
After alarm triggering: date, display key can be used again.
time, and reason for trig‐
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
gering the alarm.
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every charger will function properly.
The charging duration depends on the
Window status.
charger used.
Glass sunroof status.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
"Entry level" "Height control" Set charger and the display key.
vehicle level. Charging in the wireless charging tray may
"Vehicle Maintenance indicators of heat up the tray and the display key.
information" Condition Based Service At higher temperatures, the charge current
CBS. through the display key may be reduced, and
Status of the roadside in isolated cases the charge process may be
parking lights. interrupted temporarily.
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
less charging tray, make sure there are no
"Preconditioning With parked-car heating: objects between it and the wireless charging
setting" operate parked-car heat‐ tray.
ing.
Without parked-car heat‐ Safety information
ing: operate parked-car
ventilation. Warning
Stationary climate control When charging a device that meets the Qi
through Remote Engine standard in the wireless charging tray, any
Start. metal objects located between the device and
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
Display key battery devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
General information transmission, between the device and the tray
may impair the card function. There is a risk of
Follow the following information:
injury and risk of damage to property. When
85
charging mobile devices, make sure there are 3. Close the tray cover.
no objects between the device and the tray.
Malfunction
Charging General information
Via USB A Check Control message is displayed.
Connect the display key via the micro-USB BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
charging socket to a USB port. malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
With thermoelectric cup holder: centered ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
in the center console transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐
jects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
1. Open the tray cover.
Do not transport the display key together with
2. Place display key flush into the recess of the metal objects or electronic devices.
wireless charging tray.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
Ensure that the display is facing up. be unlocked and locked from the outside with
3. Close the tray cover. the mechanical key.
Without thermoelectric cup holder: on the Switching on drive-ready state via

left in the center console emergency detection of the BMW
display key

2. Place the display key into the middle of the It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
wireless charging tray in front of the left cup state if the display key has not been detected.
holder.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
86
Proceed as follows in this case: Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
1. Hold the display key with its back against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
the vehicle from the outside when there are
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
people in it.
ter.
2. If the display key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ NOTICE
onds.
The door lock is permanently joined with the
If the display key is not detected, slightly change door. The door handle can be moved. When
the position of the display key and repeat the pulling the door handle with the integrated key
procedure. inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
Resetting the BMW display key erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
If the charged display key cannot be switched on the outside door handle.
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Press and hold the following buttons on the dis‐
Removing
play key at the same time for at least 10 seconds
until the display is switched off and then on
again:
▷
Integrated key Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the vehicle key using the integrated key.
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety information
Warning
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
87
Locking/unlocking via the door Alarm system

lock The activated alarm system is triggered when
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐
one hand. locked via the door lock.
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
Buttons for the central

locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
back under the cover and push the cover out.
tem and interior lights come on.
Use the thumb for counter support to prevent
the cover from falling out of the door handle. Overview
3. Remove the cover. Buttons for the central locking system.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
The other doors must be unlocked or locked Press the button.
from the inside.
88
Opening ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Unlocking
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door General information
to open the door. The other doors remain
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via
locked.
the Comfort Access depends on the following
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on settings:
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
the door, the second time opens it. The other
with a light signal or a sound signal.
doors remain locked.
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the
vehicle is being unlocked.
Comfort Access
Unlocking the vehicle
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐ In addition, the following functions are executed:
tions: ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the key, this driver profile will be activated and the
door handle. settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ Convenient closing. ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐
cle. ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
BMW Digital Key. button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Open and close the tailgate with no-touch
switched off.
activation.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
89
Locking Convenient closing
General information Safety information

The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐ Warning
tings:
With convenient closing, body parts can be
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
a light signal or a sound signal. that the area of movement of the doors is clear
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded during convenient closing.
in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
warning flashers are switched on. Closing
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature is acti‐
vated during locking.
Locking the vehicle

Close the driver's door.

closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass

sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx. Opening the tailgate
1 second without grasping the door handle.
General information
The following functions are executed:
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
locked doors are not unlocked.
are locked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
switched on.
90
Safety information Without trailer hitch: touchless

opening and closing of the
Warning tailgate
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that Concept
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
during opening and closing. touch activation using the vehicle key you are
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐
Warning gate is opened and closed.
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is

General information
Make sure that the area of movement of the To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
tailgate is clear during opening and closing. do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tail‐
gate may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐
NOTICE tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement
is detected.
windows and heat conductors while driving. The sensor has an approximate range of
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do cle.
not hit the windows. If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation,
locked doors are not unlocked.
You can configure if only the upper tailgate will
Opening open or if the upper and lower tailgate opens.
When closing, the upper and lower tailgate will
always be closed.
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
91
Before the tailgate opens, the hazard warning

Warning system flashes.
Body parts can be jammed when operating the Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that tion, and moving it one more time after that will
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear close the tailgate.
during opening and closing.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Warning The hazard warning system flashes and an
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is acoustic signal sounds.
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
Make sure that the area of movement of the tion, and moving it one more time after that will
tailgate is clear during opening and closing. re-open the tailgate.
Touchless unlocking and locking

NOTICE of the vehicle
windows and heat conductors while driving. Concept
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key.
not hit the windows.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
Performing the foot movement locked.
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
General information
the vehicle. The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized
vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With The unlocking zone is located within a radius of
this movement, the leg must pass through approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.
the ranges of both sensors. The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone
for an extended period of time without move‐
ment, the vehicle will be locked automatically.
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger
seat during locking and the safety belt of the
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt
buckle during locking:
Opening
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
Perform the foot movement described earlier. against theft.
92
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐ ond vehicle key can be located in the locking
locking/locking depends on the following set‐ zone.
tings: ▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active. several days, touchless unlocking/locking is
not possible until after the vehicle has been
▷ If the automatic locking is active.
driven.
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. BMW Digital Key
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐ Concept
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐
cle on the driver's side.
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐ compatible smartphone, refer to page 71.
locked regardless of the side on which the
driver approaches the vehicle. General information
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is BMW Digital Key varies by country and may be
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐ unavailable.
nal.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the smartphone, a digital key must be installed on
vehicle is being unlocked. this smartphone. Digital keys are installed, man‐
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature is acti‐ aged and forwarded via the BMW Connected
vated during locking. app.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and signed to a digital key.
locked. When using a smartphone with a digital key, al‐
ways carry a vehicle key with you too, so the ve‐
Functional requirements hicle can still be accessed even if your smart‐
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off. phone is not working. It is also useful to carry the
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone, vehicle key with you if the vehicle has to be
the doors and tailgate must be closed. handed over to another person or a service cen‐
ter. You can then hand over the vehicle key, in‐
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the stead of your smartphone.
doors and tailgate must be closed.
▷ If the vehicle was locked with the vehicle key, Safety information
it cannot be unlocked touchless. In this case,
unlock the vehicle using the outside door
handle. Warning
▷ If the vehicle was unlocked with the vehicle People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
key, it cannot be locked touchless without doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
driving the vehicle first. In this case, lock the this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
vehicle using the outside door handle. the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.
93
The vehicle is unlocked with the outside door

Warning handle on the driver's side. The smartphone
For some country versions, unlocking from the must be placed into the smartphone tray to pair a
inside is only possible with special knowledge. digital key and to start the engine.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ The vehicle also detects a digital key when the
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ smartphone is switched off.
the vehicle from the outside when there are Functional requirements
people in it. ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on a
compatible smartphone.
Warning ▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the pends on the smartphone.
following actions: ▷ A digital key for the vehicle is installed on the
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. smartphone.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle.
dows. Proving authorization
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐
zation for his vehicle at the service center to be
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
able to use BMW Digital Key. It is possible to use
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not the key card without proving authorization.
The vehicle owner configures a digital key code
at the service center so that digital keys can be
transferred at a later time.
Key card Purchasing digital keys

The vehicle is delivered with a key card. The key An initial digital key is provided in the BMW Con‐
card can be used in the same way as a compati‐ nected app when the vehicle is purchased.
ble smartphone with a digital key. Additional digital keys can be purchased via the
A digital key that has already been paired with BMW ConnectedDrive Store. The purchase of
the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐ digital keys can cause costs.
tal key must be activated via iDrive. The period of validity of a digital key is limited.
When you exit the vehicle, take the key card with The expiration date of the validity can be
you, as it can be used to start the vehicle. checked in the BMW Connected app and in the
vehicle.
Connection to the vehicle If a digital key has expired, the vehicle can only
be unlocked and locked for a limited period and a
The communication between the vehicle and the
limited number of engine starts is possible. The
smartphone uses near-field communication,
corresponding information is shown on the Con‐
NFC.
trol Display.
94
Transferring digital keys Place the smartphone with the digital key to be
The vehicle owner can transfer a digital key for paired into the smartphone tray.
his/her vehicle to another person with a compati‐ Via iDrive:
ble smartphone via the BMW Connected app.
1. "CAR"
When a digital key is transferred, a transaction
2. "Settings"
number TAN will be generated. Another person
can pair the digital key in the vehicle with this 3. "Doors/Access"
TAN and the Digital Key Code. This makes it 4. "BMW Digital Key"
possible to allow another person to use the vehi‐ 5. "Activate Digital Key"
cle without having to be at the vehicle.
6. If necessary, enter the Digital Key Code and
The TAN and the Digital Key Code should only the TAN.
be disclosed in person or by phone.
After the digital key has been paired, its name will
The Safe Share function is available depending be displayed in the list of digital keys.
on the software version of the BMW Connected
app. If this function is activated prior to hand off, Activating/deactivating digital keys
the digital key is subject to certain restrictions.
in the vehicle
For example, some of the driving stability sys‐
tems can no longer be activated. For more infor‐ A digital key can be deactivated temporarily.
mation, refer to the ConnectedDrive portal. To activate or deactivate a digital key, a vehicle
The transferred digital key can be removed in the key must be located in the vehicle or an active
vehicle or via the BMW Connected app at any digital key of the vehicle owner must be in the
time. smartphone tray.
If the digital key has been removed via the BMW Via iDrive:
Connected App, the vehicle can still be unlocked 1. "CAR"
and locked for a limited period of time and only a
2. "Settings"
limited number of engine starts will be possible. If
the vehicle is then used with another digital key 3. "Doors/Access"
or with a vehicle key, the removed digital key can 4. "BMW Digital Key"
no longer be used. 5. Select the desired digital key.
The corresponding information is shown on the 6. "Digital Key active"
Control Display.
A deactivated digital key remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Pairing digital keys in the vehicle
To pair a digital key, a vehicle key must be lo‐ Removing digital keys in the vehicle
cated in the vehicle or an active digital key of the
vehicle owner must be in the smartphone tray. To remove a digital key, a vehicle key must be lo‐
cated in the vehicle or another active digital key
If the digital key was transferred by the vehicle of the vehicle owner must be in the smartphone
owner, it may not be possible to meet this re‐ tray. To remove all digital keys, a vehicle key
quirement. In this case, it is necessary to enter must be located in the vehicle.
the Digital Key Code and the TAN. The vehicle
can already be unlocked with the transferred dig‐ The key card cannot be removed.
ital key before it is paired.
95
Via iDrive: Starting the engine

1. "CAR" Tray with thermoelectric cup holder:
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. ▷ "Remove Digital Key"
The digital key will be removed from the
list of paired digital keys.
▷ "Remove all Digital Keys"
Tray without thermoelectric cup holder:
Resetting BMW Digital Key
To reset BMW Digital Key, an authorized vehicle
key must be located in the vehicle.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐
locked, locked or started with a digital key.
The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐
zation for his vehicle again at the service center
to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
Via iDrive:
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
1. "CAR" 2. Place the smartphone or key card centered
2. "Settings" into the smartphone tray in front of the cup
holders.
3. "Doors/Access"
3. After the digital key has been detected as au‐
4. "BMW Digital Key"
thorized, the engine can be started.
5. "Reset function"
With wireless charging tray: Take key card out of
the tray to make tray available for charging com‐
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
patible smartphones.
Sale of the smartphone/vehicle

When a smartphone with a digital key is sold, all
digital keys should be deleted from this smart‐
phone.
When a vehicle is sold, BMW Digital Key should
be reset in this vehicle. The new vehicle owner
should make sure that BMW Digital Key has
been reset. This ensures that the previous vehi‐
Hold the smartphone or key card directly on the cle owner no longer has access to the vehicle.
outside door handle of the driver's door.
96
Malfunction ▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the button in

the driver's door opens only the upper or the
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
upper and lower tailgate together.
function under the following circumstances:
▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
when the tailgate is opened with the vehicle
For replacing the battery, refer to page 81.
key.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
Safety information
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐
jects. Warning
Do not transport the vehicle key together with Body parts can be jammed when operating the
metal objects. tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the vehicle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
Warning
electronic devices.
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
Make sure that the area of movement of the
dles.
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or
use the integrated key, refer to page 87.
NOTICE
Foreign objects, such as sand or icing, between
Tailgate the bumper and tailgate may cause damage
when operating the lower tailgate. There is a
risk of damage to property. If necessary, re‐
General information move foreign objects from the bumper and the
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, lower tailgate before operating the lower tail‐
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. gate.
The tailgate consists of the upper and the lower
tailgate. The lower tailgate opens downward to
make loading the cargo area easier. NOTICE
The following settings are available for the opera‐ Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
tion of the tailgate: windows and heat conductors while driving.
▷ The opening height of the upper tailgate. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the vehicle the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
key opens only the upper tailgate or the up‐ not hit the windows.
per and lower tailgate at the same time.
97
From the inside

NOTICE Press the button in the driver's door.
Manual operation of the tailgate in the wrong
sequence can damage the tailgate. There is a If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
risk of damage to property. Close the lower tail‐ must be engaged first.
gate first before closing the upper tailgate man‐
With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower tail‐
ually.
gate will also be opened.
Interruption of the opening procedure

Upper tailgate
The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
Opening lowing situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
General information ▷ By pressing the used button used again.
It may not be possible to open the tailgate when
the vehicle is in valet parking mode, refer to Closing
page 100.
When the trailer socket is in use, the tailgate can‐ Functional requirement
not be opened with the vehicle key or with the Without Comfort Access: The lower tailgate
button in the car's interior. must be closed; otherwise, a Check Control
The upper tailgate will be opened to the config‐ message will be displayed.
ured opening height.
From the outside
From the outside Without Comfort Access:
1. Closing the lower tailgate manually.

2. Press the button on the inside of the upper
tailgate.
With Comfort Access:

▷ Press the button on the inside of the
upper tailgate.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button The lower tailgate will be closed automatically
on the outside of the tailgate. with the upper tailgate.
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key ▷ Press the button on the inside of the
with you and press the button on the outside upper tailgate.
of the tailgate.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for
hicle key for approx. 1 second. this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐
side of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower
tailgate will also be opened. The lower tailgate will be closed automatically
with the upper tailgate.
98
From the inside Press the button on the lower tailgate.

Without Comfort Access:
1. Closing the lower tailgate manually. With Comfort Access: from the inside
Depending on the settings, the lower tailgate will
2. Pull and hold the button in the driver be opened automatically with the upper tailgate.
door.
The vehicle key must be located in the car’s With Comfort Access: terminating the
interior for this function. opening procedure
With Comfort Access: The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Pull and hold the button in the driver door.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
The vehicle key must be located in the
car’s interior for this function. ▷ By pressing the button on the lower tailgate.
Pressing again closes the tailgate.
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically
Closing
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
closed. Functional requirements
There is no cargo on the lower tailgate.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ From the outside
lowing situations: Without Comfort Access:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. Closing the lower tailgate manually.
▷ By pressing the used button used again. With Comfort Access:
Press the button on the lower tailgate.
Lower tailgate
Opening With Comfort Access: from the inside
General information The lower tailgate will be closed automatically

When open, the lower tailgate can support loads
of up to 550 lbs/250 kg. With Comfort Access: terminating the
closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
The upper tailgate must be open. lowing situations:
From the outside ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
Without Comfort Access: ▷ By pressing the button in the lower tailgate.
Press the button on the lower tailgate System limits

and fold the lower tailgate down.
Without Comfort Access: The upper tailgate is
With Comfort Access: designed for electric operation via the provided
operating points.
99
With Comfort Access: The upper tailgate and the

lower tailgate are designed for electric operation
Automatic Soft Closing
via the provided operating points.
A manual operation of the tailgate can produce
Safety information
system states in which an electric operation is no
longer possible. Warning
For instance, this type of system state applies Body parts can be jammed while operating the
when there is a danger of collision between the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
upper and lower tailgate. In this case, an acoustic the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐
signal will sound and the upper tailgate must be ing opening and closing.
completely opened manually.
Operate the tailgate manually in exceptional
cases only such as in the event of a malfunction. Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
Malfunction Closing occurs automatically.
Warning
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it
Valet parking mode
can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐
age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage Concept
to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐ In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is
ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐ locked and operation via iDrive is no longer pos‐
er’s service center or another qualified service sible.
center or repair shop. E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is
handed over for valet parking.
Without Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked
upper tailgate manually and slowly without jerk‐
General information
ing.
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
With Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked up‐
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal set‐
per or lower tailgate manually and slowly without
tings cannot be changed and personal data can‐
jerking. When closing, make sure the lower tail‐
not be displayed.
gate is closed first.
Additionally, the following actions are carried out:
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically. ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
▷ Depending on the vehicle, the tailgate can be
locked and disconnected from the central
locking system.
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
100
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active. "Lock tailgate as well"

▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned The tailgate will be locked and disconnected
ConnectedDrive account. from the central locking system.
2. "Activate now"
Accessing the menu for the valet
parking mode Driver profile without PIN
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
Via the switch-off screen
1. "PIN"
After switching off drive-ready state the switch-
off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for 2. Enter PIN.
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen. 3. Depending on the vehicle, select the desired
setting, if necessary:
Via the display bar at the upper edge ▷ "Lock tailgate as well"
of the Control Display The tailgate will be locked and discon‐
1. Tip the Controller up nected from the central locking system.
2. "Valet parking mode" ▷ "Activate linkage"
This PIN will be stored for the active driver
Via the vehicle settings profile.
Via iDrive: 4. "Activate now"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Guest profile
The guest profile is the active driver profile.
A PIN must be entered.
4. "Valet parking mode"
1. "PIN"
Activating the valet parking 2. Enter PIN.
mode 3. Select the desired setting:
"Lock tailgate as well"
General information
The tailgate will be locked and disconnected
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN
from the central locking system.
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet
parking mode at a future time. 4. "Activate now"
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐ This PIN can be used once to deactivate the
pending on the active driver profile. valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐
file.
Driver profile with PIN
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐
Deactivating valet parking mode
file.
General information
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐
1. Depending on the vehicle, select the desired played on the Control Display.
setting, if necessary:
101
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐ These settings are stored for the driver profile
pends on which driver profile is selected on the currently used.
lock screen.
Unlocking and locking
Driver profile with PIN
Regardless of which driver activated the valet Doors
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet Via iDrive:
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.
1. "CAR"
1. Select driver profile.
2. "Settings"
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
3. "Key button settings"
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
4. Select the symbol.
must be deactivated by entering the assigned
ConnectedDrive access data. 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Driver profile without PIN Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
The valet parking mode was activated by another flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a the entire vehicle.
driver without a PIN has to enter the access data ▷ "All doors"
for his ConnectedDrive account.
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
1. Select driver profile.
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐ Confirmation signals from the
signed to the driver profile. vehicle
Via iDrive:
Guest profile
1. "CAR"
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
2. "Settings"
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was
activated in the guest profile. 3. "Doors/Access"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
1. Select guest profile.
tion signals:
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"
vation.
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking
ing by one.
mode must be deactivated via a personal driver
profile. ▷ With alarm system:
"Sound when locking/unlocking"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
Adjusting signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible.
102
Folding mirrors automatically When adjusting the opening height, make sure
Via iDrive: the clearance above the tailgate is at least
4 in/10 cm.
1. "CAR" Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "Doors/Access"
2. "Settings"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
3. "Doors/Access"
The exterior mirrors are automatically folded
in during locking. 4. "Tailgate"
5. "Opening height"
Automatic unlocking 6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
Via iDrive: opening height.
1. "CAR" With Comfort Access: upper or both

2. "Settings" tailgates
3. "Doors/Access" The button in the car's interior can be set
4. "Unlock at end of trip" up to open only the upper tailgate or the
After drive-ready state is switched off by upper and lower tailgate together:
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐
Via iDrive:
hicle is automatically unlocked.
1. "CAR"
Automatic locking 2. "Settings"
Via iDrive: 3. "Doors/Access"
1. "CAR" 4. "Tailgate"
2. "Settings" 5. Select the desired setting:
3. "Doors/Access" ▷ "Upper tailgate"
4. Select the desired setting: Only the upper tailgate opens.
▷ "Lock automatically" ▷ "Both tailgates"
The vehicle locks automatically after a The upper and lower tailgate will be
while if no door is opened after unlocking. opened together.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive" To open the upper and lower tailgate at
The vehicle locks automatically after you the same time, the upper tailgate must be
drive off. closed when the button is pressed.
This setting also applies to the touchless open‐
Tailgate ing of the tailgate.
Opening height of the upper tailgate Tailgate and doors

You can set how far the upper tailgate can be The button of the vehicle key can be configured
opened. to control which part of the tailgate will be
opened and if the doors will be unlocked at the
same time.
103
▷ 3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Tailgate"
Via iDrive: 5. Select the desired setting:
1. "CAR" ▷ "Upper tailgate"
2. "Settings" Only the upper tailgate opens.
3. "Key button settings" ▷ "Both tailgates"
4. Select the symbol. The upper and lower tailgate will be
5. Select the desired setting: opened together.
▷ "Upper tailgate" To open the upper and lower tailgate at
the same time, the upper tailgate must be
The upper tailgate is opened.
closed when the button is pressed.
▷ "Upper tailgate + door(s)"
This setting also applies to opening the tailgate
The tailgate is opened and the doors un‐ in the interior.
locked.
▷ "Both tailgates" Establishing idle state after
The upper and lower tailgate will be opening the front doors
opened. Via iDrive:
▷ "Both tailgates + door(s)"
1. "CAR"
The upper and lower tailgate will be
2. "Settings"
opened and the doors unlocked.
3. "Doors/Access"
Comfort Access 4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Opening the front doors establishes the idle
Touchless locking and unlocking state, refer to page 37.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Alarm system
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Comfort access"
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
▷ "Unlock when approaching" system reacts to the following changes:
▷ "Lock when walking away" ▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
Touchless opening of the tailgate
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐
For touchless unlocking, a setting can be en‐
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐
tered to open only the upper tailgate or the up‐
ing the vehicle.
per and lower tailgate together:
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
Via iDrive:
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard
1. "CAR" Diagnosis.
2. "Settings"
104
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐ To switch off the alarm: press any button.
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis. Indicator light on the interior
The alarm system signals these changes visually mirror
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning system and
headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Switching on/off
The alarm system is switched on.
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the vehicle key or via Comfort Access, the ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
alarm system is switched off and on at the same then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
time. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are
Opening the doors with the alarm not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
system switched on
When the still open access points are closed,
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐
opened if the door was unlocked using the
sor will be switched on.
integrated key in the door lock.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
Opening the tailgate with the The vehicle has not been tampered with.
alarm system switched on ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
system is switched on. longer than approx. 5 minutes:
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐ An alarm has been triggered.
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once. Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Panic mode
The alarm system responds in situations such as
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
self in a dangerous situation.
towed.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds. Interior motion sensor
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key The windows and the glass sunroof must be
three times in succession. closed for the system to function properly.
105
Avoiding unintentional alarms Power windows

General information
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized The windows can be opened with the vehicle
action occurred. key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐
fort Access.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
With Comfort Access: The windows can be
▷ In automatic vehicle washes. closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at Safety information
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle. Warning
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐ When operating the windows, body parts and
ing. objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐ or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
sor can be switched off in such situations. the area of movement of the windows is clear
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
and interior motion sensor
Overview
Press the button on the vehicle key within
10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm

▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key. Power windows
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐ Safety switch
gency detection of the vehicle key, refer to
page 82.
▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐ Functional requirements
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐ The windows can be operated under the follow‐
senger door handle completely. ing conditions.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
106
Opening Closing without the jam protection

▷ Press the switch to the resistance system
point. In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
The window opens while the switch is being prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ 1. Pull the switch past the resistance
ance point. point and hold it there.
The window opens automatically. Pressing The window closes with limited jam protec‐
the switch again stops the motion. tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
Closing
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold
point. it there.
The window closes while the switch is being The window closes without jam protection.
held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐ Safety switch
ance point.
The window closes automatically if the door Concept
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion. With the safety switch, it is possible to block par‐
ticular functions in the rear. This makes sense,
Jam protection system for instance if children or animals are carried in
the rear.
Concept The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐
The jam protection prevents objects or body dren, for instance from opening and closing the
parts becoming jammed between the door frame rear windows using the switches in the rear.
and window while a window is being closed. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a General information
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐ The following functions can be locked by press‐
terrupted. ing the safety switch:
The window opens slightly. ▷ Seat adjustments in the rear.
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows us‐
Safety information
ing the switches in the rear.
Warning Switching on/off

Accessories on the windows such as antennas Press the button.
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
The LED lights up if the safety function
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
is switched on.
movement of the windows.
107
Roller sunblinds, rear side Overview

windows
Safety information
Warning
With closed roller sunblinds and open windows,
the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐
ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may
be damaged and vehicle occupants may be Opening/closing the glass sun‐
harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open roof.
the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds
are closed.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and hook

it onto the bracket. Functional requirements
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
Glass sunroof
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
erated using the same switch.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐
side with the vehicle key and also closed with Push switch briefly upward.
Comfort Access. ▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be and the sun protection opens
closed from the outside via Comfort Access. slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
Safety information closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
Warning
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
108
Opening/closing the glass tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
sunroof and sun protection this comfort position.
separately Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
▷ Press the switch in the desired
direction to the resistance
Jam protection system
point and hold it there.
Holding down the switch Concept
opens the sun protection. If
The jam protection prevents objects or body
the sun protection is already
parts from becoming jammed between the roof
fully open, the glass sunroof
and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐
opens.
ing.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being held. General information
If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, If a resistance or blockage is detected while the
the sun protection closes. glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past position, or it is stopped when closing from the
the resistance point. tilted position.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass Closing from the open position
sunroof opens automatically. without jam protection
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass

sunroof and sun protection 1. Close all doors.
together 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Briefly press the switch twice in
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
succession in the desired direc‐
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
tion past the resistance point.
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
tection move together. Pressing
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
the switch upward stops the motion.
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
the closing area is clear.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
109
Closing from the lifted position ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
without jam protection then opens and closes again.
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
1. Close all doors.

2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Initializing after a power

interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system
can help in this case.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions:
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system

Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is complete:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.

▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
110
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
It also describes features and functions that are trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
to the selected options or country versions. This the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
served.
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
Sitting safely sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the occupants can make a vital contribution to the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐
mation in the following chapters:
Warning
▷ Seats, refer to page 111.
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 117.
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 119. to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
▷ Airbags, refer to page 178. ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Seats, front
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile currently used. When
a driver profile is selected, the stored position is
called up automatically.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
111
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Overview Seat tilt
1 Backrest width Move switch up or down.

2 Thigh support
3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt Backrest tilt
4 Upper backrest
5 Backrest tilt, head restraint
6 Lumbar support
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push the switch in the front or back.
112
Sport seat To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,

the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
The backrest width increases.
the thigh support forward or back.
Upper backrest
Lumbar support
Concept
Concept
The upper backrest supports the back in the
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
laxed seating position and reduces strain on the
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
shoulder muscles.
supported for upright posture.
General information
Adjusting
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
▷ Press the front/rear section of ready state is switched off, the upper backrest
the button: moves into the standard position.
The curvature is increased/
decreased. Adjusting
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral ▷ Press the front section of the button:
support when taking corners.
The upper backrest is inclined forward.
General information ▷ Press the rear section of the button:
You can change the backrest width by adjusting The upper backrest is inclined backward.
the side wings of the backrest.
113
Gentleman function The backrest tilt for the center section is ad‐
justed together with the left rear seat backrest.
Concept
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with
Safety information
the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to
increase the legroom in the rear. Warning
Overview seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when folding down
the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that the area of movement of
Gentleman function the center armrest is clear during folding down.
Switching on Warning
When folding back the second row of seats,
1. Press the button. The LED lights up. there is a danger of jamming. There is a risk of
2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv‐ injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
er's seat. that the area of movement of the second row of
If needed, store the memory position for the seats is clear prior to folding down.
front passenger seat.
Switching off Warning

Press the button. The LED goes out. Seats in the second row of seats are not locked
The function deactivates itself automati‐ when they are folded down and they can move.
cally after some time. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only fold the seats in the second row
down while loading. When driving without a
load, fold back and lock the seats in the second
Rear seats row before driving away.
Second row of seats
General information
The seats of the second row of seats can be ad‐
justed forward and backward including the back‐
rest tilt.
114
Overview Backrest tilt
1 Resetting to standard position Move switch forward or backward.

2 Forward/backward
3 Backrest tilt Access to the third row of seats
Safety information
Resetting to standard position
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
Press the button to reset to standard position. Fold down rear seat backrest
The process is canceled if the button is pressed 1. Fold middle section of the second seat row
again. up as necessary.
2. Push the switch once forward or backward.
Forward/backward
The seat automatically moves to the respective

Push switch forward or backward.
end position.
To avoid a collision, the position of the front
seats may be adjusted automatically.
115
If the second row of seats is not locked, an 2. Slide the lever forward to unlock the backrest.
acoustic signal will sound and a warning symbol
will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Third row of seats
General information
The third row of seats consists of two divided
seats.
Fold up the backrest 3. Fold the backrest down.
Safety information Exiting from the third row of seats
Warning
1. Fold up and engage the backrest. The second row of seats can be folded down
with the switch, refer to page 115.
Emergency unlocking rear seat

backrest
General information
The two outer backrests of the second seat row
can be folded down manually, such as in the
event of an electrical fault.
2. Adjust the head restraint correctly as needed.
Fold down rear seat backrest

1. Move the head restraints down, refer to
page 120.
116
Unlocking from the second seat row The two outer safety belt buckles of the second
row of seats are intended for the persons sitting
on the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the second row
of seats is intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐
ward. tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐
tute for safety belts.
Unlocking from the third seat row The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
ward. not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
Safety switch for the rear ported and secured in designated child
Press the button on the driver's door. restraint systems.
This locks various functions so that they cannot

be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to Warning
page 107. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
Safety belts safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
Number of safety belts and braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
safety belt buckles
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
The vehicle is fitted with five or seven safety
belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they
can only offer protection when adjusted cor‐
rectly.
117
Buckling the safety belt

Warning 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ and hip to put it on.
tective function of the middle safety belt is not 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, audibly.
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way. To ease accessibility to the safety belt buckle, an
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
modified. position the buckle when not in use.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, ened once after driving away.
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have Unbuckling the safety belt
the safety belts checked after an accident at
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. 2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to Safety belt reminder for driver's
your body over your lap and shoulders. seat and front passenger seat
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on Display in the instrument cluster
your stomach.
The indicator light lights up and a signal
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or are positioned correctly. The safety belt
fragile objects. reminder can also be activated if objects are
▷ Avoid thick clothing. placed on the front passenger seat.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
118
Safety belt reminder for rear Safety information

seats
Warning
General information
A missing protective effect due to removed or
The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐ not correctly adjusted head restraints can
vated each time the engine starts. cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a is a risk of injury.
passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐ ▷ Before driving, install the removed head
ing the trip. restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
Display in the instrument cluster ports the back of the head at as close to
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐ eye level as possible.
minates after the engine is started.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
Symbol Description straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
Green: the safety belt is buckled on backrest tilt as needed.
the corresponding rear seat.
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on

Warning
the corresponding rear seat.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
Safety mode sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐
gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐
matically.
Warning
If the situation passes without an accident occur‐
ring, the belt tension relaxes. Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
is a risk of injury.
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
Front head restraints termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
General information ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
The current head restraint position can be stored pillows, while driving.
using the memory function.
Active head restraint

In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
119
Have the active head restraint checked and if Adjusting the side extensions
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it
was exposed to an accident.
Adjusting the height
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint

forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
ing position.

Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Adjusting distance
Rear head restraints

Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
straint toward the rear. is a risk of injury.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the ▷ Before driving, install the removed head
front. restraints on the occupied seats.
After setting the distance, make sure that the ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
head restraint engages correctly. ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
120
Adjusting the height

Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
is a risk of injury. the head restraint down.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes After setting the height, make sure that the head
hangers, directly on the head restraint. restraint engages correctly.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
Removing
head restraint.
The head restraints cannot be removed.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Cushions for head restraints in
the rear
Folding down the head restraints Only use the pillow when the vehicle is switched
To improve the view to the rear, the outside head off.
restraints can be folded back. Only fold the head
restraint back if no one will be sitting in the corre‐ 1. Bring the head restraint to a sufficiently high
sponding seat. position.
2. Attach the pillow and place the pillow band
around the back of the head restraint, ar‐
row 1.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and

fold the head restraint backward.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the 3. Close pushbuttons, arrow 2.
head restraint engages correctly.
121
Exterior mirrors Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:
General information Slide the switch.
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror. Malfunction
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
currently in use. When a driver profile is selected, mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
the stored position is called up automatically.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored Folding in and out
using the memory function.
Safety information NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
Warning risk of damage to property. Before washing,
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance Press the button.
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
by looking over your shoulder.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
Overview lowing situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor Automatic dimming feature
3 Folding in and out The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior
mirror, refer to page 123, are used to control
Adjusting electrically
this.
Press the button.
The selected mirror moves along with the
button movement.
122
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior Functional requirements

mirror ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
Concept mirror and the windshield.
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other format‐ Steering wheel
ting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Safety information
Activating
Warning
1. slide the switch to the driver's side Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
mirror position. lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
2. Engage selector lever position R. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the
When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing
vehicle is stationary only.
is activated, the Automatic Curb Monitor is deac‐
tivated.
Electric steering wheel
Deactivating
adjustment
Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror
position.
General information
The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver
Interior mirror profile currently in use. When a driver profile is
selected, the position is accessed automatically
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
The current steering wheel position can be
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. stored using the memory function.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass. Adjusting
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Overview
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height

and angle to suit your seating position by press‐
ing the switch.
123
Assistance getting in and out The following settings are not stored:
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the ▷ Backrest width.
highest position to make it easier to enter and ▷ Lumbar support.
exit the vehicle.
Safety information
Heated steering wheel
Overview Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
Button for heated steering wheel seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
Switching on/off ment.
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed. Overview
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ The memory buttons are located on the front
essary, retrieved using the memory function: doors.
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position. Storing
▷ Steering wheel position. 1. Set the desired position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
2. Press the button. The writing on the
button lights up.
General information
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
Two memory locations with different settings
lit. A signal sounds.
can be set for each driver profile.
124
Calling up settings Switching on

Press the desired button 1 or 2. Press the button once for each intensity
The stored position is called up. level.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting The maximum intensity level is reached when
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐ three LEDs are lit.
tons is pressed again.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position Switching off
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Massage function
Adjusting the massage program
Concept Via iDrive:
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
1. "CAR"
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue. 2. "Settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
General information 4. Select desired seat.
Eight different massage programs can be se‐ 5. "Seat massage"
lected: 6. Select the desired setting.
▷ Pelvis activation.
▷ Upper body activation.
▷ Full body activation.
Seat and armrest heating
▷ Back massage.
Concept
▷ Shoulder massage.
The system heats seats and armrests as
▷ Lumbar massage.
needed.
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Full body training. General information
Seat heating can also be used without armrest
Overview heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as
needed.
Massage function
125
Overview If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes

after a stop, functions are activated automatically
Front with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Seat heating distribution

The heating action in the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Seat and armrest heating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Rear 2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select desired seat.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat
heating distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off

Via iDrive:
Seat heating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on 3. "Climate control"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
1. Press the button. 5. Select desired seat.
2. Select the temperature level: 6. "Heat armrests with seat"
▷ Press the button once for each level.
▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level
is reached. Press the Controller. Active seat ventilation
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen. Concept
Highest level reached when three red LEDs Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
light up on the button or three red bars are provide a comfortable seat temperature.
shown on the Control Display.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 332,
the heating output is reduced.
126
Overview When both systems are active, a push of the but‐

ton reduces the intensity of both functions by
one level each.
The last active function or function that is config‐
ured with higher intensity will be activated di‐
rectly when the system is switched on again.
When both functions with the same intensity
configuration are deactivated, the system will au‐
tomatically activate the seat heating.
Overview
Active seat ventilation
Switching on

2. Select the ventilation level:
▷ Press the button once for each level.
▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level
is reached. Press the Controller. Seat climate control
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen.
Highest level reached when three blue LEDs Switching on
light up on the button or three blue bars are
shown on the Control Display. 1. Press the button.
2. Select the desired setting via the touch‐
Switching off screen.
Press and hold the button, until the One red and one blue LED each will illumi‐
LEDs go out. nate.
Switching off
Seat climate control Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Concept
The seat climate control combines the functions
of the seat heating and active seat ventilation.
General information
The seat heating and active seat ventilation are
operated with a common button on the climate
control panel.
127
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and
Warning
options A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐
sons, especially children and animals. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave
persons, especially children and animals unat‐
tended in the vehicle.
tems. When using these functions and systems, Warning
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
served. restraint systems and their components to be‐
come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐
ries when touching the hot components. There
The right place for children is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐
straint system to direct sunlight or cover where
necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint
Safety information
system cool down before transporting a child.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Warning
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Always transport children in the
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the rear seat
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information
▷ Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
dows. Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
▷ Using vehicle equipment. the age, weight and size of the child. Children
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ no longer be used due to their age, weight, or
ing and lock the vehicle. size.
128
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information Installing child restraint

systems
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
General information
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐ Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can ating and safety information of the child restraint
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety and using child restraint systems.
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and Safety information
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
Warning
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
Children on the front passenger damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐
seat
strained in the event of an accident or braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju‐
General information
ries or danger to life.
Before using a child restraint system on the front
Do not use child restraint systems which have
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
been damaged or exposed to an accident.
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. For automatic deactivation of front- If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐
seat passenger airbags, refer to page 181. tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐
dent, have these systems checked and re‐
Safety information placed by the dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a Warning
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
129
Before mounting Seat position and height

Before mounting child restraint systems, ensure Before installing a child restraint system, move
that the rear seat backrests are locked. the front passenger seat as far back as it will go
Move the rear seats into the rearmost position to and, if possible, bring it up to medium height.
facilitate assembly of the child restraint system. This seat position and height ensure the best
possible position for the belt and offers optimal
protection in the event of an accident.
Third row of seats
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in
Before installing a child restraint system on the
front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the
third row of seats, note the following:
front passenger seat carefully forward until the
▷ Roll up the cargo cover and remove the case. best possible belt guide position is reached.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: lower
the electric cargo cover. Backrest width
▷ Remove the cargo area partition net. Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
▷ Bring seats and backrests of the second row child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
of seats into the most forward position. open the backrest width completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
▷ Fold down the respective backrest of the
up a memory position.
second row of seats and lock.
▷ Raise the head restraints of the third row of
Child seat security
seats into the highest position.
Do not change the settings that have been made
after this.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
child in a child restraint system when the air‐ ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. ten child restraint systems.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
Locking the safety belt
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
Before installing a child restraint system in the 2. Secure the child restraint system with the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front, safety belt.
knee and side airbags on the front passenger 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
side are deactivated. tight against the child restraint system. The
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐ safety belt is locked.
tomatically, refer to page 181.
130
Unlocking the safety belt Position

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
Symbol Meaning
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ The corresponding symbol
pletely. shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
LATCH child restraint fixing chors are marked with a pair, (2),
system of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
General information
It is not recommended to use
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
the inner lower anchors of
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ standard outer LATCH positions
ating and safety information from the child re‐ to fasten a child restraint system
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐ on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing hicle safety belt instead for the
systems. middle seat.
Mounts for the lower LATCH Before installing LATCH child

anchors restraint fixing systems
General information Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
Assembly of LATCH child
restrained by the internal harnesses. restraint fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
Safety information er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
Warning erly engaged.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are

not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
131
Child restraint systems Anchors

with tether strap Symbol Meaning
The respective symbol shows

Safety information the anchor for the upper retain‐
ing strap. Seats with an upper
Warning top tether are marked with this
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used symbol. It can be found on the
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ rear seat backrest or the rear
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. window shelf.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as Routing the retaining strap
it passes the upper anchor.
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that 1 Direction of travel
the rear backrests are locked.
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
NOTICE 4 Anchor
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of 5 Seat backrest
child restraint systems are only provided for 6 Upper retaining strap
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount Attaching the upper retaining
child restraint systems to the upper anchors. strap to the anchor
1. Bring the seat of the second seat row into the
base position.
Reset to standard position, refer to page 115.
2. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between or
along both sides of the supports for the head
restraint to the anchor.
Middle seat: raise the head restraint, if
needed, press the button on the mounts for
this purpose. Guide the upper retaining strap
132
between or along both sides of the supports

of the head restraint to the anchor.
4. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the
backrest and the cargo cover.
5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
6. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
7. Lower and engage head restraint as needed.
Locking the doors and

windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside

only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door.
This locks various functions so that they cannot

be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to
page 107.
133
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and Auto Start/Stop function
options
Concept
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
cific and optional features offered with the series. The system switches off the engine during a
It also describes features and functions that are stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
to the selected options or country versions. This The engine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
served. After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The
function is activated from speeds of approx.
Start/Stop button 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
system is automatically activated or deactivated.
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button Engine stop
switches drive-ready state on or
off, refer to page 37. Functional requirements
Drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake Steptronic transmission
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off automatically during a
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches stop under the following conditions:
the drive-ready state back off and standby state, ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
refer to page 37, is switched back on. D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
Driving away vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
1. Switch on drive-ready state. Automatic Hold.
2. Apply drive mode. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away. Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automatically
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be
switched off manually:
▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from
the current pedal position.
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
134
Driving CONTROLS
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
engine switches off. when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
Air conditioner when the engine is ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
switched off perature.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced ▷ Engine cooling is required.
when the engine is switched off. ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
General information ▷ At higher elevations.
The display in the tachometer in‐ ▷ The hood is unlocked.

dicates that the Auto Start/Stop ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
function is ready for an Automatic ▷ The parking assistant is activated.
engine start.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
The display indicates that the
▷ After driving in reverse.
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine

Total time with switched-off engine Functional requirements
ECO PRO, refer to page 332,
driving mode: depending on the Steptronic transmission
vehicle equipment, the total time The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
that the engine has been ing preconditions:
switched off using the Auto Start/ ▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
Stop function is displayed on an automatic en‐
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
gine stop.
accelerator pedal.
The total time can be reset via the trip data.
Driving off
Functional limitations After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations: Safety mode
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade. After the engine switches off automatically, it will
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough. not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
cooled to the required level. ▷ The hood was unlocked.
135
CONTROLS Driving
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length The function may be restricted if the navigation
of time. data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop ample.
button.
Deactivate/activate the system
System limits manually
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ Concept
lowing situations: The engine is not automatically switched off.
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when The engine is started during an automatic engine
the air conditioning is switched on. stop.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on. Using the button
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N or
R.
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N,
D, or R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
Press the button.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop Via selector lever position or Driving

function Dynamics Control
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety in selector lever position M/S or in SPORT driv‐
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The ing mode of the Driving Dynamics Control.
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function uses this in‐
formation to adapt to various traffic situations in a Display
proactive manner.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐ deactivated.
tions:
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
▷ When a situation is detected in which the tivated.
stopping time is expected to be very short,
the engine is not switched off automatically.
A message appears on the Control Display,
depending on the situation.
▷ When a situation is detected in which the ve‐
hicle needs to drive off immediately, the en‐
gine is started automatically.
136
Driving CONTROLS
Switching off the vehicle during ▷ Engine characteristics.

an automatic engine stop ▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Steering.
General information ▷ Integral Active Steering.
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can ▷ Adaptive M chassis.
be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it. ▷ Adaptive M Chassis Professional.
▷ Two-axle ride level control.
Steptronic transmission ▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ Cruise control.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on. Overview
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
Automatic deactivation
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
for instance if no driver is detected. Displays in the instrument
cluster
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches The selected driving mode is dis‐
off the engine automatically. A Check Control played in the instrument cluster.
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Driving modes
Buttons in the vehicle
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. Button Driving Configura‐
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the mode tion
situation using various driving modes. SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL
General information SPORT SPORT

PLUS
The following systems are affected, for instance:
137
CONTROLS Driving
Button Driving Configura‐ Configuration

mode tion Via iDrive:
COMFORT COMFORT 1. "CAR"
ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL 2. "Settings"

3. "Driving mode"
ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
When drive-ready state is switched on, the 5. Select the desired setting:
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
cally. rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐
Driving modes in detail tings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
COMFORT
SPORT PLUS
Concept
Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient Concept
driving. Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐
justed drive.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐ Switching on
FORT is displayed in the instrument Press the button repeatedly until
cluster. SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
SPORT
ECO PRO
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐ Concept
mized chassis and suspension. Efficient driving setting.
Switching on Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until Press the button repeatedly until ECO
SPORT is displayed in the instrument PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
cluster. ter.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

Concept Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
INDIVIDUAL driving mode. PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
138
Driving CONTROLS
Configuration
Parking brake
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Concept
2. "Settings" The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
3. "Driving mode" from rolling when it is parked.
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Safety information
rently used. Warning
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
settings: possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
ADAPTIVE
against rolling away, follow the following:
Concept ▷ Set the parking brake.
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
automatically modified to the driving situation turn the front wheels in the direction of the
and driving style. curb.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
sections are considered. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Switching on
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
Warning
played in the instrument cluster.
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
INDIVIDUAL configuration themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
General information ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The individual configuration of the driving mode ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set
configuration is activated directly when the driv‐
dows.
ing mode is called up again.
Activating configuration of the ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
driving mode There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Press the button for the desired driving mode leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
several times. hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
139
CONTROLS Driving
Overview Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Press the switch while stepping on the

brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking brake Automatic release

The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
Setting The LED and indicator light go out.
With a stationary vehicle

Automatic Hold
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up. Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ setting and releasing the brake, such as when
ter illuminates red. The parking brake is moving in stop-and-go traffic.
set.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
is stationary.
While driving On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
General information
To use as emergency brake while driving. General information
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle Under the following conditions, the parking brake
brakes hard while the switch is being is automatically engaged:
pulled. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
is stationary.
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and
the brake lights illuminate. ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle Display

is stationary. The indicator light changes from green
to red.
With Emergency Stop Assistant
Pull the switch briefly to activate the emer‐
gency stop function, refer to page 212.
140
Driving CONTROLS
Safety information Overview
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Automatic Hold
curb.
Establishing function readiness of
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Automatic Hold
wheel chock.

Warning The LED lights up.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle The indicator light lights up green.
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Automatic Hold is functional.
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
After every new vehicle start, the last se‐
following actions:
lected setting is active.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
dows.
er's door is closed.
After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance
▷ Using vehicle equipment. when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not tomatically secured against rolling.
The indicator light lights up green.
Driving off
NOTICE Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐ The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐
cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk nated.
of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic
Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash.
141
CONTROLS Driving
Activating the parking brake This process may take a few seconds. Some
automatically mechanical sounds associated with this process
are normal.
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is nated as soon as the parking brake is
exited. ready for operation again.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Turn signal
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
Turn signal in exterior mirror
vated. When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
Switching function readiness off the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Press the button.
The LED goes out. Using turn signals
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
Press the lever past the resistance point.
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure
the vehicle against rolling before exiting.
A Check Control message is displayed. Triple turn signal activation
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐ Lightly tap the lever up or down.
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐ The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
hicle.
Via iDrive:
After a power failure 1. "CAR"

To reestablish parking brake functionality after a 2. "Settings"
power failure: 3. "Exterior lighting"
1. Switch on standby state. 4. "One-touch turn signal"
2. Pull the switch while stepping on the The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set rently used.
and then push.
142
Driving CONTROLS
Signaling briefly wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
High beams, wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
headlight flasher tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
Push the lever forward or pull it backward. shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on. Press the lever up until the desired position is
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
Wiper system ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
General information
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them resume at their previous speed.
to become worn more quickly.
Switching off and brief wipe
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
Press the lever down.
143
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not
reaches its standard position. start.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position. Deactivating
The lever automatically returns to its initial Press the lever back into the standard position.
position when released.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
the rain sensor.
Safety information Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
Windshield washer system
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. Safety information
Warning
Activating
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
tion, arrow 1. washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
Wiping is started. is empty.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
144
Driving CONTROLS
Cleaning the windshield ▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,

its idle position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
its interval position when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid
reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers

Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ Concept
shield and activates the wipers briefly. The fold-away position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
Windshield washer nozzles General information

The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
heated while standby state is switched on.
blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐
tions.
Rear window wiper
Safety information
Overview
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Switching on
NOTICE
Turn the outer switch upward.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
tinuous operation. shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. Folding away the wipers
1. Switch on standby state.
145
CONTROLS Driving
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the Safety information
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
ing, for instance with the parking brake.
Selector lever positions

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the Drive mode D
windshield.
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
tomatically.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes in selector lever
Folding down the wipers
position N.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Parking position P
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield. General information
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the wiper lever down again. the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
3. Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation. Engage selector lever position P only when the
Steptronic transmission P is engaged automatically

Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
Concept cally in situations such as the following:
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ ▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed. gaged.
▷ After the standby state has been switched off
when selector lever position N is engaged.
146
Driving CONTROLS
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the 3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary selector lever automatically returns to the
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐ center position when released.
gaged.
Engaging selector lever

positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements Engaging selector lever position P

Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
change from selector lever position P to another
selector lever position.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engaging selector lever position D,

N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty Press button P.
operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐ Rolling or pushing the vehicle
tion R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ General information
sition P into another selector lever position. In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
1. Fasten driver's safety belt. its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer
to page 140.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
147
CONTROLS Driving
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ Activating the Sport program
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Press the selector lever to the left from selector
gaged when standby state is switched off. lever position D.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
cluster, for instance S1.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
cally after approximately 35 minutes. vated.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position. Ending the Sport program
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if Push the selector lever to the right.
needed, refer to page 150. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Kickdown Manual mode M/S

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Concept
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐ Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
ance point at the full throttle position.
Activating manual mode
Sport program M/S 1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐
tor lever position D, arrow 1.
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
148
Driving CONTROLS
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument Short-term manual mode

cluster, for instance M1. In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
Shifting After conservative driving in manual mode with‐
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
ward. for a certain amount of time, the transmission
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. switches back to automatic mode.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐ It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
cally in certain situations, for instance when follows:
speed limits are reached. ▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Steptronic Sport transmission: ▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S the left shift paddle.
manual mode
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 138, is se‐ Continuous manual mode
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode dle switches into manual mode permanently.
once the maximum speed is reached.
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration, Steptronic Sport transmission
this function is active independently of the driv‐ With the appropriate transmission version, the
ing mode. lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ neously activating kickdown and operating the
down. left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
term manual mode.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right. Shifting
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.

General information
▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
Shifting ▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and keep the left shift paddle pulled.
road speeds. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
149
CONTROLS Driving
Displays in the instrument 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.

cluster 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P. For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 395.
Launch Control
Electronic unlocking of the Concept

transmission lock Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
General information rounding conditions.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area. General information
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the The use of Launch Control causes premature
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling component wear since this function represents a
away. very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
Engage selector lever position N refer to page 322, period.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
engine. with Launch Control.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
Launch Control is available when the engine is at
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
pressed.
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at
3. With your free hand, press the button on the least 6 miles/10 km.
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold, Start with launch control
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed. 2. Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.
150
Driving CONTROLS
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument

cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
151
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and Overview
options
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 1 Fuel gauge 159
served. Range 161
2 Speedometer
Instrument cluster 3 Central display area 152
Service notifications 161
Concept Navigation display
The instrument cluster is a variable display. 4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐
When you change to a different program via Driv‐ tion Camera
ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐ 5 Tachometer 160
ment cluster adapt to the respective driving
Selection lists 164
mode.
Widgets in the instrument cluster 154
General information Trip odometer, see Trip data 165
The display change in the instrument cluster can ECO PRO displays 332
be deactivated via iDrive. Status, Driving Dynamics Control 137
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster Transmission display 146
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
6 Engine temperature 161
Manual.
7 External temperature 161
8 Check Control 155
9 Speed Limit Assist 238
Speed Limit Info 163
Time 61
Central display area

Depending on the equipment and configuration,
the following is displayed in the central display
area of the instrument cluster:
152
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,

if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐
Assisted Driving View
view with destination guidance information.
▷ Displays showing service notifications.
Concept
▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about the With active driving assistance, the assist system
assist systems is displayed in an animated displays information using figures in the instru‐
surrounding area of the vehicle. ment cluster.
Some displays in the central display area can be

configured individually.
General information
Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
View can be displayed permanently or tempora‐
ment version and country variant.
rily with active driving assistance in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Driving mode view
Safety information
Concept
When the driving mode view is deactivated, the
displays in the instrument cluster remain un‐ Warning
changed and do not adapt to the respective driv‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
ing mode when the program is changed via Driv‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
ing Dynamics Control. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
Activating/deactivating traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Adjusting
3. "Displays"
Permanent display
4. "Driving mode view"
Via iDrive:
Adjusting 1. "CAR"
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can 2. "Settings"
be configured individually. 3. "Displays"
1. "CAR" 4. "Instrument panel"
2. "Settings" 5. "Central display area"
3. "Displays" 6. "Assisted Driving View"
4. "Instrument panel"
Temporary display
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
153
CONTROLS Displays
4. "Instrument panel" Selecting

5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver
Assistance is active"
Display
Continue to press the button on the turn signal

lever until the desired widget is selected.
Display
Example: the indicator/warning lights for the Ac‐
tive Cruise Control with Stop & Go function ACC
and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane
change to the next lane. At the same time, the
lane change to the next lane is shown with ani‐
mation in the Assisted Driving View.
System limits
The system's detection potential is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account. Efficiency display
Concept
Widgets in the instrument
Information about driving style and consumption
cluster can be displayed in the form of a consumption
display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for
Concept example.
Displays for specific functions can be displayed
in the instrument cluster. General information
The following displays can be selected: Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐
ent information will be displayed:
▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.
▷ Torque and power.
▷ Acceleration power, G meter.
▷ Trip data.
▷ Efficiency display.
154
Displays CONTROLS
Driving Display General information

mode A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
COMFORT Average consumption.
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
SPORT Current consumption. cable, in the Head-up Display.
Energy recovery. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range. text message may appear on the Control Display.
Distance traveled in Coasting
mode. Hiding Check Control messages
Current consumption.
Average consumption
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption when driving a specific route.
Current consumption
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐ Press the button on the turn signal lever.
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Continuous display
Energy recovery Some Check Control messages are displayed
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
vehicle is converted into electric energy during function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
and fuel consumption can be reduced. utively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
ECO PRO bonus range onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐
sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range. Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Check Control Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Concept
Displaying stored Check Control
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
messages
the monitored systems. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
155
CONTROLS Displays
3. "Check Control messages" cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in

4. Select the SMS text message. the monitored systems.
Display General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
Check Control ety of combinations and colors.
At least one Check Control message is Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
displayed or stored. tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state is switched on.
SMS text messages Red lights

SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Safety belt reminder
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
tor/warning lights.
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
Supplementary SMS text messages minder can also be activated if objects are placed
Additional information, such as the reason for an on the front passenger seat.
error or malfunction or the required action, can
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
be called up via Check Control.
correctly.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
ther help can be selected. The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
Via iDrive: responding rear seat.
1. "CAR"
Airbag system
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control messages" Airbag system and belt tensioner may
not be working.
4. Select the desired text message.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
5. Select the desired setting. by a dealer's service center or another qualified
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
played again after drive-ready state is switched
Parking brake
off. The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
page 140.
Indicator/warning lights
Concept
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐
156
Displays CONTROLS
Brake system Additional information:
Braking system impaired. Continue to Person warning with City braking function, refer
drive moderately. to page 194.
Have the vehicle checked immediately

by a dealer's service center or another Night Vision with pedestrian and
qualified service center or repair shop. animal detection
An infrared camera scans the area in
Front collision mitigation front of the vehicle and issues a warning
if it detects pedestrians and animals on
The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐
the street.
warning. Brake and increase distance.
The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
warning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if
signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an
necessary.
evasive maneuver, if necessary.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
Additional information:
sounds: acute warning. Immediate braking or
Front collision mitigation, refer to page 183. evading maneuver.
Intersection collision warning Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
The indicator light is illuminated: risk of tion, refer to page 197.
collision with crossing vehicle.
Yellow lights
Indicator light is illuminated: risk of colli‐
sion with vehicle without detectable di‐
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
rection of travel or prewarning for vehi‐
cles that cross own direction of travel. The Brake Assistant function may not
Self-intervention such as braking. activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the
longer braking distance into account.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross own Have the system immediately checked
direction of travel. by a dealer's service center or another
Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐
sary.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
Intersection collision warning, refer to page 190.
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
Person warning with City braking your driving style to the driving circumstances.
function
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic tioned.
signal sounds: imminent collision with a Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
detected person or a cyclist. er's service center or another qualified service
Intervene immediately by braking or make an center or repair shop.
evasive maneuver.
157
CONTROLS Displays
DSC, refer to page 219. Steering system

Steering system may not be working.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is Have the system checked by a dealer's
deactivated or DTC Dynamic service center or another qualified serv‐
Traction Control is activated ice center or repair shop.
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
DSC, refer to page 219, and DTC, refer Emissions
to page 221. ▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
Flat Tire Monitor FTM vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
pressure in a tire. cumstances:
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. in the engine.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 366. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM ously damage emission control components,
The indicator light illuminates: the Tire in particular the catalytic converter.
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐ Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
formation in the Check Control message. page 386.
The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated

continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses
Green lights
cannot be detected.
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐
the area of the interference, the system auto‐ sponding rear seat.
matically becomes active again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is Turn signal
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center Turn signal switched on.
or repair shop as needed. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
dealer’s service center or another qualified failed.
service center or repair shop. Turn signal, refer to page 142.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 359.
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
page 171.
158
Displays CONTROLS
Low beams Cruise control

Low beams are switched on. Indicator light is illuminated: the system
Parking lights/low beams, refer to is active.
page 171. Cruise control, refer to page 227.
Lane departure warning Active Cruise Control with Stop &

The indicator light lights up: the system Go function
is activated. A lane marking was detected The indicator light lights up: the system
on at least one side of the vehicle and is switched on.
warnings can be issued. Additional information:
Lane departure warning, refer to page 200. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function, refer to page 229.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on. Speed Limit Assist
Front fog lights, refer to page 175. Indicator light illuminates together with
the symbol for a cruise control system:
Speed Limit Assist is active and detected
High-beam Assistant
speed limits can be applied manually for the dis‐
High-beam Assistant is switched on. played system.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐ Indicator light illuminates: the detected
uation. speed limit can be applied with the SET
button. As soon as the speed limit has
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 173.
been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.
Automatic Hold Additional information:

Speed Limit Assist, refer to page 238.
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
is automatically held in place when it is
stationary. Blue lights
Automatic Hold, refer to page 140.
High beams
High beams are switched on.
Speed Limiter
High beams, refer to page 143.
The indicator light lights up: the system
is switched on.
The indicator light flashes: the set speed Fuel gauge
limit has been exceeded.
Concept
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 225.
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
159
CONTROLS Displays
General information Display

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 338.
Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed as ▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
numerical value. tachometer.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields
Indicator light in the instrument indicate an increase in the speed.
cluster ▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields
The yellow indicator light illuminates, indicate the upcoming shift moment.
once the fuel reserve is reached. ▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait
any further to shift.
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire
Tachometer display flashes red and the supply of fuel is inter‐
rupted in order to protect the engine.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
Shift point indicator The letters OFF in the tachome‐
ter indicate that drive-ready state
Concept is switched off and standby state
is switched on.
The shift lights indicate the upshift point at which
the best possible acceleration can be achieved.
The letters READY in the tach‐
Functional requirement ometer indicate that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
Shift lights are shown when the SPORT or start the engine automatically.
SPORT PLUS driving program is activated.
For further information, see Idle state, standby

Switching on/off state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 37.
1. Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving
mode.
Press Driving Dynamics Control.
2. Activate the M manual mode of the transmis‐
sion.
160
Displays CONTROLS
Engine oil temperature Range

Display Concept
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at The range indicates the distance that can still be
the low temperature end. covered with the current fuel level.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds. General information
▷ Normal operating tempera‐ The estimated range available with the remaining
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐ fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument
dle or in the lower half of the cluster.
temperature display. With a low remaining range, a Check Control
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
the temperature range. In addition, a Check driving style, for instance fast cornering, the en‐
Control message is displayed. gine function is not always ensured.
To check the coolant level, refer to page 383. The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Indicator light in the instrument

Safety information
cluster
A red indicator light is displayed.
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
External temperature sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
Display
signal sounds.
The current range is displayed as
numerical value next to the fuel
There is an increased risk of ice on roads. gauge.
Safety information
Warning
Service notifications
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is Concept
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to The function displays the service notifications
the weather conditions at low temperatures. and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
161
CONTROLS Displays
General information Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ Via iDrive:
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ 1. "CAR"
nance.
2. "Vehicle status"
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice notifications from your vehicle key. 3. "Service schedule"
Some information on service notifications can 4. "BMW Service"

also be shown on the BMW display key. 5. "Date:"
Display
Detailed information on service Gear shift indicator

notifications
More information on the type of service required Concept
may be displayed on the Control Display. The system recommends the most efficient gear
Via iDrive: for the current driving situation.
1. "CAR"
General information
2. "Vehicle status"
Depending on the design and country version,
3. "Service schedule" the gear shift indicator may be active in the M
Maintenance and service measures and le‐ manual mode of the Steptronic transmission.
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information. Steptronic transmission:
displaying
Symbols Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Sym‐ Description
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
bols
gaged gear is displayed.
No service is currently required.
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.

The time for recommended mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching. Shift into efficient gear.
The time for recommended mainte‐
nance has already passed.
Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
162
Displays CONTROLS
Speed Limit Info Overview
Camera
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed
limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,
the Head-up Display.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
as overhead sign posts.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
clean and clear.
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐ Displaying Speed Limit Info
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
The system takes into account any information General information
that is stored in the navigation system and also Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
displays speed limits present on routes without Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐
signs. ment cluster or via iDrive.
Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed
when the trailer power socket is in use or trailer Activating
towing was activated via iDrive. Via iDrive:
Safety information 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
Warning 3. "Driver Assistance"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the 4. If necessary, "Driving"

driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. 6. "Speed limits"
7. "Show current limit"
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Display
Speed Limit Info

Current speed limit.
163
CONTROLS Displays
Depending on the equipment, ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
Speed Limit Info not available. of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded, temperatures.
the indicator light will flash. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
Adjusting ▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
Via iDrive: navigation system are incorrect.
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day
1. "CAR"
and the day of the week.
2. "Settings"
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
3. "Driver Assistance" tem.
4. If necessary, "Driving" ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
5. "Speed Limit Assistance" as due to changes in road routing.
6. Select the desired setting: ▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐ ▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info signs applied to them.
display in the instrument cluster and, ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
where applicable, the Head-up Display
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel
when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐
road are detected.
ceeded. The warning that is issued when
a speed limit is exceeded may depend on ▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and
the Speed Limit Assist settings. road configurations.
▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is after vehicle delivery.
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐
eter in the instrument cluster.
Selection lists
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may Concept
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐ Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for
uations: certain functions in the instrument cluster or the
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Head-up Display.
▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐ ▷ Entertainment source.

cealed by objects, stickers or paint. ▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
164
Displays CONTROLS
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open

on the Control Display.
Trip data
Display Concept
Values for the trip, such as the average con‐
sumption or trip miles, are displayed.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster.
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling.
Depending on the equipment version, the list in Display on the Control Display
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration. Overview
The following information is displayed based on
Displaying and using the list the configured interval:
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
Button Function ▷ Average fuel consumption depending on the
Change the entertainment configured interval.
source. ▷ Average speed.
Pressing the button again will ▷ Total time for shut off engine through the
close the currently displayed Auto Start/Stop function.
list. ▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
Show list of most recent tele‐ ▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.
phone calls.
Displays
Turn the thumbwheel to select
the desired setting. Via iDrive:
Press the thumbwheel to con‐ 1. "CAR"
firm the setting. 2. "Driving information"
The currently selected list can 3. "Trip data"
be displayed in the instrument
cluster by turning the thumb‐
Consumption history
wheel.
The average consumption is shown in the con‐
sumption history in form of a chart based on the
distance traveled and the driving mode.

Information about the route can be displayed as
widget in the tachometer. Selecting and setting
165
CONTROLS Displays
widgets in the instrument cluster. Further infor‐ With the button on the turn signal lever:
mation: Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer
1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐
to page 154.
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is
The following information is displayed: selected.
▷ Total mileage.
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config‐
ured interval.
▷ Average speed.
Adjusting the display of the trip

data
The intervals for the display of the trip data in the 2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal
instrument cluster and on the Control Display are lever.
adjustable.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since"
4. "Data since"
5. "Reset individual"
The average values and counters are reset.
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐ Once the average values and counters have
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐ been reset, the following interval is automatically
hicle has come to a standstill. set: "Individual ( )".
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset after refueling with a larger
quantity of fuel. Sport displays
▷ "Factory": the values since the time of the
factory delivery are displayed. Concept
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last The Sport displays especially support a sporty
manual reset are displayed. The values driving style.
can be reset at any time.
Display on the Control Display
Resetting average values
manually Overview
The following interval can be reset manually at The following information is displayed:
any time: "Individual ( )".
▷ Boost pressure.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
▷ Acceleration power, G meter.
166
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Torque. Symbols Description

▷ Power.
"Engine oil level": electronic oil
measurement, refer to
Displays
page 379.
Via iDrive:
"Check Control messages": dis‐
1. "CAR" playing stored Check Control
2. "Driving information" messages, refer to page 155.
3. "Sport displays" "Service schedule": displaying
service notifications, refer to
Display in the instrument cluster page 161.
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 154. Head-up Display
The following widgets can be selected:
▷ Widget for torque and power. Concept
▷ Widget for acceleration power, G meter. This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
Vehicle status his or her eyes from the road.

The status can be displayed and actions per‐ Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up
formed for several systems. Display.
Opening the vehicle status Overview

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the

run-flat tires, refer to page 366.
Switching on/off
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
Via iDrive:
of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM, refer to page 359. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
167
CONTROLS Displays
4. "Head-up display" 5. "Brightness"

5. "Head-up display" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
Display 7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
Overview brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
The following information is displayed on the tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Head-up Display:
▷ Vehicle speed. Adjusting the height
▷ Navigation instructions. Via iDrive:
▷ Check Control messages. 1. "CAR"
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. 2. "Settings"
▷ Driver assistance systems. 3. "Displays"
▷ Sport displays. 4. "Head-up display"
▷ xOffroad displays 5. "Height"
Some of this information is only displayed briefly 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
as needed. reached.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display rently used.
Via iDrive:
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
1. "CAR" stored using the memory function.
2. "Settings"
Setting the rotation
3. "Displays"
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
4. "Head-up display"
Via iDrive:
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 1. "CAR"
rently used. 2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Setting the brightness 4. "Head-up display"
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
5. "Rotation"
ambient brightness.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
selected.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
168
Displays CONTROLS
Additional settings Special windshield

Via iDrive: The windshield is part of the system.
1. "CAR" The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
2. "Settings"
A film in the windshield prevents double images
3. "Displays"
from being generated.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
5. Select the desired setting: the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the set‐ service center or another qualified service center
tings for the speed assistant. or repair shop, if necessary.
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and
Shift Lights in the Head-up Display.
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays
are only displayed in SPORT driving
mode.
▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐
tinuously displayed in the Head-up
Display.
▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐
tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐
formation can be displayed in the lower
section of the Head-up Display.
Visibility of the display

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
169
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function
options Parking lights.

cific and optional features offered with the series. Automatic headlight control.
It also describes features and functions that are Adaptive light functions.
to the selected options or country versions. This Low beams.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Instrument lighting.
served.
Right roadside parking light.

Lights and lighting
Left roadside parking light.
Switches in the vehicle
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
The light switch element is located next to the
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
steering wheel.
cipitation.
Symbol Function
General information
Front fog lights. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Night vision. If the low beams are switched on manually, the

automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Lights off. Activating

Daytime running lights. Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
170
Lights CONTROLS
The LED in the button lights up. Switching off

The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
switched on.
After the drive-ready state is switched on, the
automatic headlight control will be activated.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as Low beams
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions. Switching on
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Press the button on the light switch ele‐
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch ment.
the lights on manually.
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
is switched on.
Parking lights, low beams The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
and roadside parking lights ter lights up.
Press the button again to switch on the low

General information beams when the standby state is switched on.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is Switching off
automatically switched off after a period of time.
Depending on the country variant, the low beams
can be switched off in the low speed range.
Parking lights
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
General information ment.
The parking lights can only be switched on in the
low speed range. Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
Switching on parking light can be switched on.
Button Function
ment.
Right roadside parking light on.
ter lights up.
Left roadside parking light off.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ Switching off the roadside parking light:
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive- Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ready state. ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
171
CONTROLS Lights
Welcome lights Headlight courtesy delay

feature
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐ General information
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after the
Activating/deactivating drive-ready state is switched off.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Setting the duration

2. "Settings" Via iDrive:
3. "Exterior lighting" 1. "CAR"

4. Select the desired setting: 2. "Settings"
▷ "Welcome and goodbye" 3. "Exterior lighting"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual 4. "Pathway lighting"
light functions are switched on for a lim‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
ited time.
6. "OK"
▷ "Door handle lights"
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited Daytime running lights
time.
▷ "Welcome Light Carpet" General information
The area next to the vehicle is illuminated The daytime running lights light up when drive-
for a limited time. ready state is switched on.
LED light carpet Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights in front.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. Depending on country specifications:
The light source is located in the position indi‐ "Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
cated. lights, rear"
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
172
Lights CONTROLS
Adaptive light functions The cornering light is automatically switched on

depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐
cable, the use of turn signals.
Concept When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐ be automatically switched on regardless of the
tion of the roadway. steering angle.
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one Adaptive headlight range
system or multiple systems, depending on the control
equipment version:
▷ Adaptive Light Control. The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
ances out acceleration and braking processes as
▷ Cornering light.
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of
Activating the road is optimized.
ment.
High-beam Assistant
The LED in the button lights up.
The adaptive light functions are active when the Concept
drive-ready state is switched on.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
Adaptive Light Control the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation.

Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
course of the road.
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive beams are not switched on by the system.
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
The system responds to light from oncoming
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
Cornering light The high beams can be switched on and off

manually at any time.
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering Activating
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a 1. Press the button on the light switch
certain speed. element.
The LED in the button lights up.
173
CONTROLS Lights
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever. Sensitivity of the high-beam
Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
be adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
ter is illuminated when the low beams are If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
switched on. ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐ If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
tween low beams and high beams. tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Driving interruption with activated high-beam As‐

sistant: the High-Beam Assistant remains acti‐ The setting can only be performed when the ve‐
vated when driving continues. hicle is stationary. The drive-ready state must be
switched on and the light must be turned off.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off.
Adjusting the sensitivity
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever. Push the turn signal lever to the front for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds more
sensitively.
Deactivating
Resetting the sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front again for
approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready
state.
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant is re‐
set to the factory settings.
Press the button on the turn signal lever. System limits

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
174
Lights CONTROLS
The system is not fully functional in the following Safety information

situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming The label is in the headlight and is visible from
traffic on highways. the outside.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior Fog lights
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Front fog lights
Laser high beams Concept

The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.
Concept
The range of the high beams is increased and Functional requirement
ensures an even better illumination of the road.
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
General information
When the high beams are switched-on, starting Switching on/off
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically Press the button.
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐ The green indicator light in the instru‐
mation can be obtained from the laser label on ment cluster lights up if the front fog
the headlight. lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control is activated, the

low beams will come on automatically when you
switch on the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
175
CONTROLS Lights
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights

on/off
Functional requirement Press the button.
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness. To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Adjusting The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The but‐
Adjust the brightness with the
ton is located in the rear roofliner.
thumbwheel.
Switching the reading lights

on/off
Press the button.
Interior lights Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐

ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
General information the front and rear.
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐ Ambient light
trolled.
General information
Overview Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
Buttons in the vehicle rior.
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Via iDrive:
Interior lights
1. "CAR"
Reading lights 2. "Settings"

3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
176
Lights CONTROLS
Selecting the color scheme Panoramic glass sunroof,

Via iDrive: lighting
1. "CAR" If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sun protection is closed, the lighting is switched
2. "Settings" off.
4. "Color"
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond
Surround Sound System
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive: General information
1. "CAR" Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
2. "Settings"
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be
switched off.
4. "Brightness"
5. Select the desired setting. Switching on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐
Dynamic light hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐
Individual actions, for example incoming calls or hicle is locked.
opened doors, are indicated by light effects. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting"
3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
4. "Dynamic light" The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
5. Select the desired setting. file currently used.
Dimmed while driving Setting the brightness

Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed Via iDrive:
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 3. "Interior lighting"
2. "Settings" 4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
3. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness"
4. "Dimmed for night driving" 6. Select the desired setting.
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
177
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag In the rear

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Side airbag
3 Head airbag 6 Knee airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts tects the side of the body in the chest and lap
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ area.
equate protection. Depending on the equipment:
178
Safety CONTROLS
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag in risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
the rear protects the chest and lap area on the possible when the airbag is triggered.
side of the bodies of the occupants in the outer ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
rear seats. correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
Head airbag the dashboard.
In the event of a side impact, the head airbag ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
protects the head. away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
Ejection Mitigation mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ son.
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants senger side must stay clear - do not attach
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
pact events. tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
Knee airbag ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of cover panels, do not cover them or modify
a frontal impact. them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
Protective effect the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
General information other objects to the front passenger seat that
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ are not specifically suited for seats with
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents. integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
Information on optimum effect of the ets, over the backrests.
airbags ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
Warning also applies to steering wheel covers, the
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ dashboard, and the seats.
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
system cannot provide protection as intended Even when you follow all instructions very
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
timum protective effect of the airbag system.
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
Customer Relations for further information.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
179
CONTROLS Safety
Functional readiness of the Strength of the driver's and

airbag system front-seat passenger airbag
Safety information General information

The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
Warning seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ To maintain the accuracy of this function over
jury. Do not touch individual components. the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Warning
Calibrating the front seats
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the Warning
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐ There is a risk of jamming when moving the
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
a dealer’s service center or another qualified ment.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Press the switch and move the respective
When drive-ready state is switched on, seat all the way forward, until it stops.
the warning light in the instrument clus‐
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates
moves forward slightly.
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐
tem and the belt tensioners. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
Malfunction
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
▷ Warning light does not come on
the calibration.
when drive-ready state is switched
on. If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
possible.
Have the system checked.
180
Safety CONTROLS
Automatic deactivation of To enable correct recognition of the occupied

seat cushion:
the front-seat passenger ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
airbags other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Concept
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
tem is to be installed on it.
ance.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
push against the seat from below.
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
General information
Indicator light for the front-seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ passenger airbags
structions for children on the front passenger The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
seat, see Children. airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
Safety information The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
Warning After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
airbags are either activated or deactivated.
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ ▷ The indicator light lights up
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be when a child is properly
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries seated in a child restraint sys‐
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ tem or when the seat is
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
Malfunction of the automatic ▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
deactivation system instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
When transporting older children and adults, the cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐ vated.
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up.
Detected child restraint systems
In this case, change the sitting position so that
The system generally detects children seated in
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
and the indicator light goes out.
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
the person sit in the rear. ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
181
CONTROLS Safety
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐

ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child Warning
restraint system has been detected and the Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
Intelligent Safety manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
Concept style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the and actively intervene where appropriate.
driver assistance systems.
General information Warning

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐ Due to system limits, individual functions can
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
that can help prevent an imminent collision. Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
▷ Front collision mitigation.
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
▷ Evasion Assistant.
▷ Intersection collision warning.
▷ Person warning with City braking function. Overview
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
Button in the vehicle
tection.
▷ Lane departure warning.
▷ Blind spot collision warning.
▷ Side collision mitigation.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Intelligent Safety
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Switching on/off
propriate. Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
182
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status Front collision mitigation

Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on. Concept
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ The system may prevent some accidents. In the
gent Safety systems are switched off event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
or currently unavailable. pact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
Safety systems are switched off.
ently, if needed.
Press the button.

General information
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem is displayed.
tem is controlled by the following sensors:
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
all systems are now switched on.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
ual settings are activated and stored for the above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting ings may vary with the current driving situation.
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
are activated. tentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐ tem reactions.
ing settings are switched between: Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐
time. sion and visibility also affect the timing of the
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are warnings.
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ Safety information
vidually switched off.
Warning
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
switched off. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
propriate.
183
CONTROLS Safety
Camera
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
manner that is not consistent with their normal
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning
clean and clear.
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a With radar sensor
Overview
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of

the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Intelligent Safety
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
tem is displayed.
184
Safety CONTROLS
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the 5. "Front collision mitigation"

equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ 6. Select the desired setting:
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
▷ "Early"
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting ▷ "Medium"
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
are activated. The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐ Warning with braking function
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Display
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
subfunctions.
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
switched on according to the individual settings. nent.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Manual switching off Brake and increase distance.
Press and hold this button. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
All Intelligent Safety systems are signal sounds: acute warning.
switched off. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Prewarning

Safety systems are switched on. This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Safety systems are switched off. Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐
Setting the warning time minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Via iDrive: proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
1. "CAR"
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐
2. "Settings"
pending on the driving situation and the equip‐
3. "Driver Assistance" ment version, the acute warning may be accom‐
4. "Safety and warnings" panied by a brief activation of the braking
system.
185
CONTROLS Safety
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐ System limits
tivation of the braking system is omitted.
If an acute warning is provided, the system may Safety information
also provide assistance, such as through braking,
when there is risk of collision.
Warning
Acute warnings may be provided even when
The system is designed to operate in certain
there has been no prior warning.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
Braking intervention spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warning is active, the maximum braking force is warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐ tem’s operation and limitations.
fully.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision. Detection range
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
City brake function: the braking intervention oc‐
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
With radar sensor: the braking intervention oc‐
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the
braking intervention occurs as a brief braking
pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
taken into account.
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention Thus, a system reaction might not come or
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or might come late.
by actively moving the steering wheel. The following situations may not be detected, for
The system’s ability to detect objects may be instance:
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the them at high speed.
limitations of the system and actively intervene
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
as warranted.
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Upper speed limit

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
186
Safety CONTROLS
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐

low this speed, the system is reactivated.
Evasion Assistant
Functional limitations Concept

The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ The system supports the driver in making eva‐
lowing situations: sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles or persons suddenly appear.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
General information
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
The system issues a warning and intervenes to
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
terior mirror. space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high viding targeted steering support.
temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine Safety information
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Warning
after vehicle delivery. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
low in the sky. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
▷ When it is dark outside. traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: after
Warning
improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint in the area of the radar sensors. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also limit
the function of the radar sensors and may even
cause them to fail.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ Overview
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions. Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
187
CONTROLS Safety
Camera
Front center bumper.

clean and clear.
▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 194, is switched on.
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 183, is
Front side bumper. switched on.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
driving off.
Warning with evasion support

Rear bumper.
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
sensors clean and unobstructed.
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
188
Safety CONTROLS
Symbol Measure Detection range

Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

signal sounds: acute warning for ob‐
stacles.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic The system's detection potential is limited.
signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐
destrians.
taken into account.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary. Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
Acute warning with evasion support The following situations may not be detected, for
example:
An acute warning is displayed when there is an
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
approaching another object at a high speed. them at high speed.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐ or sharply decelerating vehicles.
ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
Acute warnings may be provided even when ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Safety information
Warning
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
The system is designed to operate in certain ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
terior mirror.
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high
tem’s operation and limitations. temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
189
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun tion.
low in the sky. The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
▷ When it is dark outside. cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐
sensors are dirty or covered. ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the
timing of the warnings.
paint in the area of the radar sensors. Detection range
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in Vehicles that cross your direction of travel can be
the beam area of the radar sensors will also limit detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐
the function of the radar sensors and may even cles enter into the detection range of the system.
cause them to fail.
Safety information
Intersection collision Warning

warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Concept and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
The system may prevent some accidents with
cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the
propriate.
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
Warning
range before an imminent collision and activates
brakes independently, if needed. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
General information to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
The system is controlled by the following sen‐ manner that is not consistent with their normal
sors: use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
▷ Radar sensors on the side in the front and actively intervene where appropriate.
bumper.
▷ Radar sensor in the center in the front
bumper. Warning
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐ Due to system limits, individual functions can
sued when a danger of collision with crossing malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
traffic is detected. Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of
190
Safety CONTROLS
Overview
Front center bumper.

Keep the radar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Intelligent Safety Switching on/off
Camera The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Press the button.
tem is displayed.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
clean and clear.
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
Radar sensors is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
The radar sensors are located in the front are activated.
bumper.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
Front side bumper. vidually switched off.
191
CONTROLS Safety
Manual switching off Sym‐ Measure

Press and hold this button. bol
All Intelligent Safety systems are Danger of collision with vehicle

switched off. crossing from the right.
Button Status Danger of collision with vehicle

crossing from the left.
Safety systems are switched on.
Danger of collision with vehicle for
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ which the direction of travel cannot
gent Safety systems are switched off be determined.
or currently unavailable.
Prewarning:
Button does not light up: all Intelligent Symbol lights up red: prewarning for
Safety systems are switched off. vehicles that cross your direction of
travel.
Setting the warning time Intervene yourself, for instance by
Via iDrive: braking.
1. "CAR" Acute warning:

2. "Settings" Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
3. "Driver Assistance"
vehicles cross your direction of
4. "Safety and warnings" travel.
5. "Front collision mitigation" Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
6. Select the desired setting: ver, if necessary.
▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium" Prewarning
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. For example, a prewarning is displayed when a
danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
tected.
currently used.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
Warning with braking function as warranted.
Display Acute warning with braking function

A warning symbol appears in the instrument An acute warning is displayed in the event of an
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐ immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐ hicle.
nent. Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an
acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐
vide assistance, such as through braking, when
there is risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
192
Safety CONTROLS
Braking intervention Detection range

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
might come late.
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the The following situations may not be detected, for
limitations of the system and actively intervene instance:
as warranted.
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by
buildings, for instance.
System limits
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Safety information
▷ Crossing bicycles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ ▷ In tight curves.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
tem’s operation and limitations. ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
Upper speed limit shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
The system responds to crossing vehicles when
your own speed is below approx. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
50 mph/80 km/h. porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
193
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because ▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun ▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside. Detection range
paint in the area of the radar sensors.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also limit
the function of the radar sensors and may even
cause them to fail.
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
Warning sensitivity ided into two areas:
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
example the warning time, the more warnings are vehicle.
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ of the central area.
actions.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
Person warning with City pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
braking function central area.
Concept Safety information

The system can help prevent accidents involving
pedestrians and cyclists. In the event of an acci‐
dent, the system may reduce impact speed. Warning
The system sounds a warning in the city speed The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
range before an imminent collision and activates driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
brakes independently, if needed. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
General information propriate.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Warning
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
tem is controlled by the following sensors: manner that is not consistent with their normal
194
Safety CONTROLS
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving With radar sensor

Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Overview Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐

structed.
Switching on/off
driving off.
Press the button.
Intelligent Safety tem is displayed.
Camera
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. tween:
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
clean and clear. switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
195
CONTROLS Safety
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
switched on according to the individual settings. stability has not been restricted, for instance by
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
vidually switched off. The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
Manual switching off
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
Press and hold this button. limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
All Intelligent Safety systems are formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
switched off. limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
Button Status

System limits
Safety information
or currently unavailable. Warning
Button does not light up: all Intelligent conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
Safety systems are switched off. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
Warning with braking function of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
Display er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Upper speed limit
The red symbol is displayed and a signal The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
sounds. when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Detection range
Braking intervention The system's detection potential is limited.
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
warning is active, the maximum braking force is sued late.
used when the brake is applied. This requires the The following situations may not be detected, for
brake pedal to be depressed sufficiently quickly instance:
and forcefully. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
assist with braking. cause of the viewing angle or contour.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
196
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.
Night Vision with
pedestrian and animal
Functional limitations detection
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
Concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
▷ In tight curves. tion is a night vision system.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ An infrared camera scans the area in front of the
activated, for instance DSC OFF. vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ trians and animals on the street. The system de‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ tects warm objects that are similar in shape to
terior mirror. human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high play.
temperatures.
General information
Thermal image
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
improperly performed work on the vehicle The image shows the heat radiated by objects in
paint in the area of the radar sensors. the field of view of the camera.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ objects a dark appearance.
pact the function of the radar sensors and may The ability to detect an object depends on the
even cause them to fail. temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds

above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
197
CONTROLS Safety
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a Safety information

fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection Warning

propriate.
Warning
Object detection and warning only functions in Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
darkness. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐
ficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
above a certain minimum size, for instance deer. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐ and actively intervene where appropriate.
age activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐
low.
Overview
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐
low.
Range of object detection, with good ambient

conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m.
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m.
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx.
230 ft/70 m.
Intelligent Safety
Environmental influences can limit the availability
of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detection
is temporarily switched off.
198
Safety CONTROLS
Adjusting the thermal image

Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. Select brightness or contrast:
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
Thermal image
Warning function
Camera
Display
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
Symbol lights up red. Prewarning.

The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐
ternal temperatures are low. Symbol flashes red and a sig‐ Acute warning.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the nal sounds.
camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals
when the windshield washer system is activated. The displayed symbol may vary and shows the
side of the road on which the person or animal
Switching on was detected.
Switching on automatically Warning of people or animals in

When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐ danger
cally active after every driving off. If a collision with a person or an animal detected
in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐
Switching on the thermal image pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-
The thermal image from the Night Vision camera up Display.
can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐ Although both the shape and the heat radiation
tion to the warning function. This function has no are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
effect on object detection.
Press the button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the

Control Display.
199
CONTROLS Safety
Warning area in front of the vehicle Display in the Head-up Display

The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
System limits
Basic limits
lowing situations:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
The warning area for the person warning con‐ curves.
sists of two parts:
▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐
detection
tween the central or expanded area.
In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐
the direction of the steering angle and changes
trians.
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes, for instance longer Small animals are not detected by the object de‐
and wider. tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Limited detection, for instance in the following
Prewarning circumstances:
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
son is detected in the central area immediately in
covered, especially when their heads are cov‐
front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right
ered.
side in the extended area.
▷ People who are not in an upright position, for
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐
instance lying down.
mal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐
If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or
cumbent bicycles).
making an evasive maneuver.
▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐
Acute warning stance after an accident.
Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐

mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the Lane departure warning
vehicle.
If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an
evasive maneuver immediately.
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.
200
Safety CONTROLS
General information Functional requirement

This camera-based system warns starting at a The camera must detect the lane markings for
minimum speed. the lane departure warning to be active.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety Overview
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering Button in the vehicle
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be‐
fore leaving the lane.
Depending on the equipment version, if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system may intervene
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the Intelligent Safety
vehicle in the lane.
Safety information Camera
Warning
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident.
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
Warning clean and clear.
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Switching on/off
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving The lane departure warning activates automati‐
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely cally after departure if the function was switched
and actively intervene where appropriate. on at the end of the last trip.
201
CONTROLS Safety
Switching on manually Setting the warning time

Press the button. Via iDrive:
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ 1. "CAR"
tem is displayed. 2. "Settings"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, 3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ 5. "Lane Departure Warning"
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ 6. Select the desired setting:
ual settings are activated and stored for the ▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
are activated. ▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
Press the button repeatedly. for instance during passing without a turn
signal or when purposely driving over lane
markings in curves.
tween:
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
subfunctions. file currently used.
switched on according to the individual settings. Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
vidually switched off. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Manual switching off 2. "Settings"
Press and hold this button. 3. "Driver Assistance"
All Intelligent Safety systems are 4. "Steering wheel feedback"
switched off. 5. "Vibration intensity"
Button Status
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
Button lights up green: all Intelligent tems and stored for the driver profile currently
Safety systems are switched on. used.
Switch steering intervention on/off
or currently unavailable. The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for blind spot collision warning
Button does not light up: all Intelligent and lane departure warning.
202
Safety CONTROLS
Via iDrive: the system within 3 minutes without the driver's

intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic
1. "CAR"
warning will sound. A short warning signal will
2. "Settings" sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐
3. "Driver Assistance" ginning with the third steering intervention, an
4. "Safety and warnings" continuous warning will sound.
5. "Lane Departure Warning" In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐

played.
6. "Steering intervention"
The warning signal and Check-Control message
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
file currently used. the lane.
Display in the instrument cluster With trailer towing

The symbol illuminates green: at lane If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
marking was detected on at least one ing is activated, for instance during operation
side of the vehicle and warnings can be with trailer or bicycle rack, no steering interven‐
issued. tion takes place.
Warning function End of warning

For instance, the warning will be canceled in the
If you leave the lane following situations:
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has ▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐ ▷ When returning to your own lane.
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐ ▷ When braking hard.
ting.
▷ When using the turn signal.
When the turn signal is switched on in the corre‐
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
sponding direction before changing the lane, a
warning is not issued.
System limits
Steering intervention
Safety information
Depending on the equipment version: if, in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system may intervene Warning
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ The system is designed to operate in certain
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐ of damage to property. Actively intervene as
ing an active steering intervention, the display in warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
the instrument cluster will blink. er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
Warning signal
Depending on the equipment version: in the
event of multiple active steering interventions by
203
CONTROLS Safety
Functional limitations General information

lowing situations:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects. the area behind and next to the vehicle when
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front traveling faster than a minimum speed.
of you. The minimum speed is country-specific and is
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun systems.
low in the sky. The system indicates whether there are vehicles
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
terior mirror. The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
porarily switched off due to excessively high Before you change lanes after setting the turn
temperatures. signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
via the Start/Stop button. The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
after vehicle delivery. Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds
of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐
A Check Control message may be displayed
tervene with a brief active steering intervention
when the system is not fully functional.
and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.
The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐
mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is
Blind spot collision warning displayed on the Control Display in the menu for
the steering intervention.
Concept
Blind spot collision warning detects vehicles in Safety information
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in
Warning
various gradations in these situations.
204
Safety CONTROLS
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
propriate. sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Switching on automatically
Blind spot collision warning is automatically acti‐
vated after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
and actively intervene where appropriate. Press the button.
tem is displayed.
Overview
are activated.

Intelligent Safety tween:
Radar sensors subfunctions.

All Intelligent Safety systems are
The radar sensors are located in the rear switched off.
bumper.
205
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status Vehicles with side collision

mitigation: switching steering
intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ and off separately for blind spot collision warning
gent Safety systems are switched off and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
1. "CAR"
6. "Steering intervention"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance" rently used.
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection" Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late"
▷ "Off": with this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
rently used.
Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration
Via iDrive:
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
1. "CAR" when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
2. "Settings" proaching from behind.
4. "Steering wheel feedback"
Acute warning
When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐
5. "Vibration intensity"
cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐
6. Select the desired setting. brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ flashes brightly.
tems and stored for the driver profile currently The warning stops when the other vehicle has
used. left the critical area or the turn signal has been
deactivated.
206
Safety CONTROLS
Vehicles with side collision ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

mitigation much faster than your own.
When there is no response to the vibration of the ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
steering wheel at speeds of up to ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active for instance by stickers.
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐ ▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering cle paint.
wheel and can be manually overridden at any ▷ If cargo protrudes.
time. Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
Flashing of the light pact the function of the radar sensors and may
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking even cause them to fail.
serves as system self-test. For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the
steering intervention can be limited, for instance
System limits in the following situation:
Safety information merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
Warning ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ ▷ When lane markings are not white.
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of damage to property. Actively intervene as of you.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
tem’s operation and limitations. of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Upper speed limit shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. terior mirror.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
temporarily. porarily switched off due to excessively high
If the vehicle speed falls below approx. temperatures.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
sponds according to the setting. via the Start/Stop button.
Functional limitations after vehicle delivery.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ A Check Control message is displayed when the
lowing situations: system is not fully functional.
207
CONTROLS Safety
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐ brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system
ing is activated, for instance during operation will carry out an active steering intervention.
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐
played. Safety information
Displaying warnings Warning

Depending on the selected warning settings, The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
cess of premature warnings of critical situations. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
propriate.
Side collision mitigation
Concept Warning
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐ Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
sions. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
General information or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
space next to the vehicle from a minimum speed
Overview
of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is Button in the vehicle
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision.
For this purpose, the system issues a warning
with a flashing LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐
208
Safety CONTROLS
Intelligent Safety Switching on/off
Radar sensors
The side collision mitigation activates automati‐
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers. cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
Press the button.
tem is displayed.
Front bumper. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
are activated.

tween:
Rear bumper. "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
sensors clean and unobstructed. subfunctions.
Camera

All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.

clean and clear.
209
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status If necessary, an active steering intervention takes

place to prevent the collision and maintain the
Button lights up green: all Intelligent vehicle within its own lane.
The steering intervention can be noticed on the
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ steering wheel and can be manually overridden
gent Safety systems are switched off at any time.
System limits
Safety information
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration Warning
Via iDrive: The system is designed to operate in certain

1. "CAR" tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
2. "Settings" spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
4. "Steering wheel feedback" er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
5. "Vibration intensity" tem’s operation and limitations.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ Functional limitations
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Warning function ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.
Light in the exterior mirror ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐
cle paint.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
Acute warning ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
brates. A Check Control message is displayed at ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
the same time. of you.
210
Safety CONTROLS
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because General information

of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
via the Start/Stop button. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately the area behind the vehicle.
after vehicle delivery. When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in certain speed, the system responds as follows:
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ ▷ Active Protection: when a collision seems to
pact the function of the radar sensors and may be unavoidable, PreCrash functions are trig‐
even cause them to fail. gered.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Safety information
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
ing is activated, for instance during operation
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be Warning
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
played. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Rear collision preparation traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Concept
The system reacts to vehicles approaching from
behind. Warning
211
CONTROLS Safety
Overview Emergency Stop Assistant

Radar sensors
Concept
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the system
helps to safely bring the vehicle to a standstill.
General information
The emergency stop function is not triggered
automatically. The emergency stop function can
only be triggered manually by the occupants.
When the system is activated, the vehicle is
The radar sensors are located in the rear brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
bumper. lane guidance.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Depending on the equipment version and na‐
sensors clean and unobstructed. tional market version, the system includes a lane
change function.
With lane change function: On motorways or mo‐
Switching on/off torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle
The system is automatically active after every to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐
driving off. ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the
tions: actual road.
▷ When driving in reverse.
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer
Overview
towing is activated, for instance during opera‐
tion with trailer or bicycle rack.
System limits
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
Parking brake
slowly.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. Functional requirements
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, ▷ The function can be activated at speeds of
for instance by stickers. approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx.
▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered, 155 mph/250 km/h.
e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills.
212
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Lane changes are executed at speeds of ap‐ ▷ Parking brake is set.

prox. 43 mph/70 km/h up to approx. ▷ Interior lights are switched on.
62 mph/100 km/h.
▷ Central locking system is unlocked.
Activating the emergency stop

Displays in the instrument
function
cluster
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly
to activate the emergency stop function. Symbol Status
▷ With lane change function: Releasing the
Emergency Stop function active.
switch may trigger an automatic lane change.
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for
a maximum of 2 minutes.
Without lane change function:
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
▷ An Emergency Request is triggered. Symbol Status
Green steering wheel symbol:

Canceling the emergency stop When lane markings are detected,
function the system keeps the vehicle in the
lane.
The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐
tion by actively taking control of the vehicle Gray steering wheel symbol:
throughout the entire process.
Lane guidance is briefly interrupted.
For instance, the emergency stop function will
be canceled in the following situations: Yellow steering wheel symbol:
▷ When steering. Lane marking driven over.
▷ When using the turn signal. When lane markings are detected,
the system keeps the vehicle in the
▷ During acceleration.
lane.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐
tem. Yellow steering wheel symbol:
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request. The hands are not grasping the
▷ When switching the selector lever position at steering wheel. The system is still
standstill. active.
▷ When the driver's foot remains on the accel‐ Red steering wheel symbol and a
erator pedal after the function has been trig‐ signal sounds:
gered. The hands are not grasping the
▷ When the switch of the parking brake is steering wheel. Interruption of lane
pressed. guidance is imminent.
Red steering wheel symbol and a

At standstill signal sounds:
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system Lane guidance is switched off.
will carry out the following settings:
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
213
CONTROLS Safety
System limits The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐
constraints on use of the system in your state or
ure.
country prior to the initial use. In addition, the
The system cannot replace the driving perform‐ laws with respect to use of the system should be
ance of a driver who is fit to drive. verified in regular intervals, especially when bor‐
ders are frequently crossed.
BMW Drive Recorder Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed

about the system. In addition, information about
the system is required when handing off the ve‐
Concept hicle.
The system stores brief video recordings of the
surrounding area of the vehicle, e.g., to docu‐ Functional requirements
ment traffic events. ▷ The system is activated.
Additionally, the following parameters are stored ▷ Recording type selected.
for the trip:
▷ Recording time selected.
▷ Date.
▷ Time. Activating/deactivating
▷ Vehicle speed. The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐
▷ GPS coordinates. fore the first use of the recording function.
Via iDrive:
General information
1. "Apps"
There are various ways for storing video record‐
2. "Drive Recorder"
ings:
3. "Settings"
▷ Automatic storage of the recording.
4. "Recording allowed"
The function allows the documentation of the
event of an accident. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Manual storage of the recording.
Recording functions
The function allows the documentation of
traffic situations.
Automatic recording
The system records up to 20 seconds before
The recording is stored automatically when the
and after the activation of the storage.
vehicle sensors detect an accident occurrence.
Cameras of the assistance systems are used, for
instance Panorama View.
Manual recording
Using the button:
Data protection
The permissibility of recording and using video Press and hold this button.
recordings is contingent upon the statutory regu‐
lations of the country in which the system is to Via iDrive:
be used. The user is responsible for the use of
1. "Apps"
the system and compliance with the respective
regulations. 2. "Drive Recorder"
214
Safety CONTROLS
3. "Start recording" 4. "RECORDING TYPE"

To stop the recording: "Cancel". 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Manually"
Recording playback and ▷ "Automatically"
administration
Stored video recordings can be played back, ex‐ Recording time
ported and deleted.
Via iDrive:
For your own safety, the recording is only dis‐
played in front up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h. In 1. "Apps"
some national-market versions, the recording is 2. "Drive Recorder"
only displayed if the parking brake is engaged or 3. "Settings"
if the selector lever is in selector lever position P.
Via iDrive:
▷ "Before trigger"
1. "Apps" Recording time before an event.
2. "Drive Recorder" ▷ "After trigger"
3. "Saved recordings" Recording time after an event.
4. Select desired recording.
5. Select the desired setting: Cameras
▷ "Play" Via iDrive:
▷ "Pause" 1. "Apps"
▷ "Export" 2. "Drive Recorder"
▷ "Delete" 3. "Settings"
▷ "Previous. recording" 4. "Camera selection"
▷ "Next recording" 5. Select desired camera.
If a camera change occurred during the record‐ In case of an accident, the system switches au‐
ing, different segments of the video can be se‐ tomatically to "All" cameras.
lected.
System limits
Adjusting In the event of serious accidents, it may not be
possible to store recordings if the damage on the
General information vehicle is too great or the power supply was in‐
Different settings can be made. terrupted.
Recording type
Via iDrive:
Active Protection
1. "Apps"
Concept
2. "Drive Recorder"
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
3. "Settings" vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or
collision situations.
215
CONTROLS Safety
General information ▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow

gap.
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
functions, which can vary depending on the ▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass
equipment. sunroof, including sun protection.
The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐ ▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This the front: automatic positioning of the back‐
includes the following critical driving situations: rest for the front passenger seat.
▷ Emergency stop. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
▷ Severe understeering.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
▷ Severe oversteering.
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
Certain functions of several systems can, within ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐ safety belt before continuing on your trip.
gering:
All other systems can be restored to the desired
▷ Front collision mitigation: automatic brake in‐ setting.
tervention.
▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐ PostCrash – iBrake
tection: Brake Assistant.
▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐ Concept
nent rear collisions. In the event of an accident, the system can bring
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
Safety information vention by the driver in certain situations. This
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the
consequences thereof.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the At standstill
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, critical situation could not be detected After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident. matically.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Harder vehicle braking
propriate. In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake
Assistant allows.
Function To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and For a brief period, the braking pressure will be
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐ higher than the braking pressure that is achieved
ened once after driving away. by the automatic braking function. Automatic
In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐ braking is interrupted.
vidual functions become active as needed:
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
216
Safety CONTROLS
Interrupting automatic braking ▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of

the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
era.
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
sive maneuver. Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system
is active and can also display a recommendation
Interrupt automatic braking:
to take a break.
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal. Break recommendation
Adjusting
Fatigue alert The fatigue alert is active automatically with each
switching on of drive-ready state and can thus
General information display a break recommendation.
The system can detect decreasing alertness or The break recommendation can also be
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it Via iDrive:
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
1. "CAR"
Safety information 2. "Settings"
Warning 4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the 5. Select the desired setting:
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's ▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or made with a defined value.
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
issued earlier.
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. ▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.
Display
Function If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
The system is switched on each time drive-ready message is displayed in the Control Display with
state is switched on. the recommendation to take a break.
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐ During the display, various settings can be se‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐ lected.
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected. After a break, another recommendation to take a
This procedure takes the following criteria into break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
account: mately 45 minutes.
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior. System limits
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of The function may be limited in the following sit‐
trip. uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
warning at all:
217
CONTROLS Safety
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.

▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
218
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant
options In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions.
Drive-off assistant
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Concept
served. This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Driving off
Anti-lock Braking System
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
ABS 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, which increases Depending on the vehicle loading or when a
the active safety. trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Brake assistant
Concept
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐ Within the physical limits, the system helps to
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐ engine speed and by braking the individual
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐ wheels.
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System
ABS. General information
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
for the duration of the emergency stop. ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
219
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Safety information Deactivating/activating DSC
Warning
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
curves.
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust as soon as possible.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Deactivating DSC
ate. Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with Activating DSC
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Press the button.
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of light go out.
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load. Display
In the instrument cluster

Overview When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls

the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
220
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC

Control Activating DTC
Press the button.
Concept
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
Control where forward momentum is optimized. lights up.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ Deactivating DTC
what limited driving stability. Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
General information light go out.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- the instrument cluster.
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose Indicator/warning lights
ground.
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
▷ When driving with snow chains. vated.
Overview
Automatic program change
Button in the vehicle In certain situations, the DSC is activated auto‐
matically:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. The interaction of xDrive and other suspen‐
sion control systems, such as DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control, further optimizes traction and
221
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the Display in the Head-up Display
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐
Some of the information can also be displayed in
manded by the driving situation and road surface.
the Head-up Display.
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change
the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented
to sport oriented. M sport differential
With the xOffroad package, the all-wheel-drive
system is additionally adjusted for the respective The active M differential provides for continu‐
xOffroad driving mode. ously variable locking of the rear axle differential
Because of the needs-based use of the all- depending on the driving situation. This prevents
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐ spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby pro‐
tion in consumption. vides optimal traction in any driving situation.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐
Display on the Control Display ing style to the situation.
Display xView display

Automatic Differential
Via iDrive:
Brake
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information" The system controls the driving force by auto‐
3. "xOFFROAD" matic braking intervention on individual wheels.
or The function works in the same way as a differ‐
ential lock and improves traction on a loose sur‐
"xVIEW"
face, for example. The system detects when a
The following information is displayed: wheel begins to spin and automatically brakes
▷ With a navigation system: compass display this wheel.
for the driving direction. The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
▷ With navigation system: elevation for the cur‐ better traction.
rent position. As a result, the engine force is transferred more
▷ With navigation system: destination flag in efficiently to the wheels during accelerations.
compass direction to the destination.
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐
centage. HDC Hill Descent Control
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication.
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle.
Concept
HDC Hill Descent Control is a downhill control
▷ Level setting for the 2–axle air suspension.
feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep
With the xOffroad package, the following addi‐ downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐
tional information can be displayed: paved roads.
▷ With Surround View: depending on the When the system is active, the vehicle moves at
speed, terrain-specific camera perspectives. the speed set by the driver, without the driver
▷ xOffroad driving mode currently active. having to depress the brake pedal.
▷ Distribution of drive torque to the wheels.
222
While HTC is controlling the speed, the system Display in the instrument cluster
automatically distributes the braking force to the
individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐ A symbol and the selected de‐
ity and stability. If necessary, the Antilock Brake sired speed are displayed.
System prevents the wheels from locking. ▷ Indicator green: HDC is active.
The system is actively braking
General information the vehicle.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds ▷ Gray display: HDC is on standby.
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Speeds can be set between approx. Display in the Head-up Display
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The HDC status can also be displayed in the
When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system Head-up Display.
reduces the speed to the set value, within the
physical limits.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
Overview speed
Using the cruise control rocker

switch
The desired speed can be changed using the
cruise control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
HDC
Activating HDC
▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐
Press the button. The LED on the button creases gradually.
lights up.
▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐ speed increases while the rocker switch is
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐ pressed.
sired speed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed de‐
Emergency braking function, Active PDC: the creases gradually.
emergency braking function, refer to page 249,
▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
is deactivated.
speed decreases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
223
Using the brake pedal Tuning

While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐ The system offers several different tunings.
sired speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal. Driving mode Integral Active Steering
COMFORT Comfortable, for optimal

Deactivating HDC ECO PRO travel comfort.
Press the button again. The LED goes out.
SPORT Dynamic, for greater agility.
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
Malfunction trol, refer to page 137.
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Using snow chains
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels
when operating with snow chains, rear axle
Integral Active Steering steering of the integral active steering must be
switched off when snow chains are mounted.
Concept Set operation with snow chains, refer to
page 358.
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐
neuverability and makes a more direct steering
response possible. Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
General information must be turned further at lower speeds, while the
vehicle responds more sensitively to steering
Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐
wheel movements in the higher speed range.
ble steering ratio and rear axle steering.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
The steering is more direct because the variable
activated.
steering ratio amplifies the wheel angle while
maneuvering. The rear axle steering acts to in‐ Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning Have the system checked by a dealer's service
the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction center or another qualified service center or re‐
to the front wheels. pair shop.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐
sults in, for instance better directional stability
and a more harmonious change of direction.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐
steering.
224
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and Operation
options Switching on
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Press the button on the steering wheel.
It also describes features and functions that are The current speed is accepted as the speed
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due limit.
to the selected options or country versions. This If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ stationary or driving at low speeds,
tems. When using these functions and systems, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
served.
corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
Speed Limiter namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving
mode may be switched on as well.
Concept Switching off

The system can be used to set a speed limit, for
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding Press the button on the steering wheel.
speed limits.
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐
General information lowing situations, for example:
The system can limit the speed, starting at a ▷ When the engine is switched off.
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be ▷ When cruise control is switched on.
driven at any speed below the set speed limit. ▷ When certain programs are activated via the
Driving Dynamics Control.
Overview The displays go out.
Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting

If the reverse gear is engaged or at idle, the sys‐
Button Function
tem is interrupted when rolling backwards.
System on/off.
Store current speed.

gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit.
225
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Changing the speed limit Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes
while the vehicle speed is greater than
the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,
a signal sounds.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit increases or ▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below the
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds
after some time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed ▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex‐
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal
all the way down, there is no signal.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐
hicle is not actively braked. Displays in the instrument
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a
cluster
value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit. Display in the speedometer
The current speed can also be stored by press‐ ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
ing a button: tive.
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted.
▷ No marking: system is
Exceeding the speed limit switched off.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
limit, a warning is issued. Indicator light
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally. ▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐
There is no warning in this case. tem is switched on.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to ▷ The indicator light flashes: the set
intentionally exceed the set speed limit. speed limit has been exceeded.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated. terrupted.
226
Cruise control
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
Concept or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The system maintains the desired speed. The tervene where appropriate.
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Overview
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise Buttons on the steering wheel
control settings may change under certain condi‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐ Button Function
pending on the driving mode.
Cruise control on/off.
Safety information
Warning
Continue cruise control with the last
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the setting.
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the Pause cruise control.
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust Store current speed.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ gested speed manually.
ate.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an increased Switching cruise control on/off
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance: Switching on
▷ On winding roads. Depending on the equipment version,
▷ In heavy traffic. press the relevant button on the steer‐
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet ing wheel.
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐ The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
age to property. Only use the system if driving up and the marking on the speedometer is set to
at constant speed is possible. the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
227
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if When the system is switched on, the current
necessary. speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
Switching off The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
Depending on the equipment version, eter.
press the relevant button on the steer‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
ing wheel. necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is ton.
deleted.
Press the button.
Pausing cruise control

Changing the speed
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
until the desired speed is set.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driving is clear.
Dynamics Control.
resistance point, the desired speed increases
Setting the speed or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
Maintaining and storing the speed
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the system is interrupted.
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
228
Continuing cruise control System limits

An interrupted cruise control can be continued The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
by calling up the stored speed. The speed may not be maintained on uphill
Make sure that the difference between current grades if the engine power is insufficient.
speed and stored speed is not too large before In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
tional braking or accelerating may occur. some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
Press the button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ Active Cruise Control with
ues. Stop & Go function ACC
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Concept
▷ When the system is switched off.
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
Displays in the instrument The system maintains the desired speed on
cluster clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes
automatically.
Display in the speedometer If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
tive, the marking indicates the distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
desired speed. speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
lows.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed. General information
▷ No marking: system is switched off. A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and
a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles
driving ahead of you.
Indicator light Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
▷ Indicator light green: system is active. control settings may change under certain condi‐
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
been interrupted. pending on the driving mode.
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off. The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
Displays in the Head-up Display If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
Some system information can also be displayed then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
in the Head-up Display. the system is able to detect this within the given
The symbol is displayed when the set system limits.
desired speed is reached.
229
Safety information ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
Warning
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ where appropriate.
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Overview
ate.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and With steering and traffic jam assistant:
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Cruise control on/off.
ing. With steering and traffic jam assistant:
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Select function.
against rolling away, follow the following: Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
▷ Set the parking brake. tant:
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Cruise control on/off.
Store current speed.
curb.
gested speed manually.
wheel chock. With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Pause cruise control.
Warning Continue cruise control with the last

setting.
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐ Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic tant:
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Continue cruise control with the last
tervene where appropriate. setting.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐

tant:
Warning
Pause cruise control.
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐ Increase the distance.
ing situations: Switch distance control on/off.
230
Button Function The maximum speed that can be set is limited

and, e.g., depends on the vehicle and the vehicle
Reduce distance. equipment version.
Switch distance control on/off. The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Radar sensor
With steering and traffic jam
assistant: Assisted Driving Mode
General information
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐

marily used function.
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ Set function
structed.
1. When the system is active, press the
Camera button repeatedly until the desired function is
selected in the function bar. The function bar
for Assisted Driving mode is displayed at the
bottom of the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐

trol.

trol and steering and traffic jam assistant.
clean and clear. ▷ Cruise control with distance con‐
The selected function is shown in green.
Area of application
The system is best used on well-constructed rently used.
roads. The system is functional at speeds begin‐
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
231
Switching on Interrupting automatically

With steering and traffic jam assistant: The system is automatically interrupted in the
1. Press the button on the steering ▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
wheel. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
2. If necessary, set the cruise control.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant:
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to extended period, for instance on a road with
the current speed. very little traffic without curb or shoulder
Cruise control is active. The current speed is markings.
maintained and stored as desired speed. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
necessary. ▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
Switching off tem.
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time. Setting the speed
Press the button on the steering wheel:
Maintaining and storing the speed
tant.
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is

deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the steering
wheel: Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐
tivated.
tant.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
With steering and traffic jam assistant. desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
If interrupting the system while stationary, press eter.
on the brake pedal at the same time.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
232
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ Reduce distance

ton.
Press the button repeatedly until the
Press the button. desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.

Changing the speed
Increase the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
Continuing cruise control

An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly Make sure that the difference between current
until the desired speed is set. speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the tional braking or accelerating may occur.
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
Press the button on the steering wheel with the
is clear.
system interrupted:
resistance point, the desired speed increases Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. tant.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past With steering and traffic jam assistant.
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the ues.
action.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Adjusting the distance
▷ When the system is switched off.
Safety information ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Warning
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk
of accident or risk of damage to property. Be
aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust
the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐
tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐
tance, possibly by braking.
233
Changing between cruise control Display in the speedometer

with/without distance control ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
Safety information desired speed.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
Warning rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored ▷ No marking: system is switched off.
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Adjust the desired Distance to vehicle ahead of you
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed. Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
shown.
Symbol Description
Switch mode of the cruise control
Distance 1
Switching cruise control without distance control
off and on:
▷ Press and hold this button.
▷ Press and hold this button. Distance 2

Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch
on distance control:

Distance 3
With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on
distance control:
Press the button.
Distance 4
After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐ This value is set automatically
played. after the system is switched on.

No distance control display, as
cluster the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
234
Detected vehicle Symbol Description
Symbol Description The vehicle symbol and dis‐

tance bars flash red and an
Green symbol: acoustic signal sounds:
A vehicle has been detected Brake and make an evasive ma‐
ahead of you. neuver, if necessary.
System interrupted.
The system maintains the set distance to the ve‐

hicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move
away. With Steering and traffic jam
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by assistant: indicator/warning lights
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or
pressing the rocker switch. Symbol Description
Vehicle symbol white:

Without Steering and traffic jam No distance control display, as
assistant: indicator/warning lights the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
Symbol Description
Green symbol:
Indicator light green: system is
A vehicle has been detected
active.
ahead of you.
No indicator light: system is
The vehicle symbol goes out if
switched off.
no vehicle in front is detected.
Vehicle symbol flashes: Vehicle symbol flashes green:
The conditions are not adequate Vehicle in front drove off.
for the system to work.
Gray symbol:
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐ System interrupted.
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
235
Symbol Description System limits

Symbol flashes gray:
Detection range
The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
Vehicle symbol flashes red and a

signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive ma‐ The detection capacity of the system and the
neuver, if necessary. automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
Displays in the Head-up Display detected.
Desired speed Deceleration

Some system information can also be displayed The system does not decelerate in the following
in the Head-up Display. situations:
The symbol is displayed when the set ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
desired speed is reached. users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
Distance information ▷ For cross traffic.
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐ ▷ For oncoming traffic.

tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is
too short. Swerving vehicles
The distance information is active in the follow‐

ing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer
to page 167.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
236
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ Driving off

lected distance in certain situations, including if In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles automatically; for example:
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ▷ On steep uphill grades.
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐ ▷ In front of bumps in the road.
quests that the driver intervene by braking and ▷ With a heavy trailer.
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Cornering Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
When the desired speed is too high for a curve, ▷ Snowfall.
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves ▷ Slush.
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a ▷ Fog.
curve at an appropriate speed.
▷ Glare.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐ situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
tected very late. stance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
When you approach a curve the system may Malfunction

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you Radar sensor
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
activated and controls speed independently.
by damage incurred, for instance during parking.
237
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
tem fails. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
Have the system checked by a dealer's service closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
center or another qualified service center or re‐ ate.
pair shop.
The system may be impaired when the detection
range of the radar sensor is partially covered Warning
such as by the license plate holder. The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
Camera dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
The function for detecting and responding when conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in tervene where appropriate.
the following situations:
Overview
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A Buttons on the steering wheel
Check Control message is displayed.
Button Function
Speed Limit Assist Apply suggested speed manually.
Concept Rocker switch:

When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit
along the route, this new speed value can be ap‐ Switching on/off and adjusting
plied for the following systems:
Via iDrive:
▷ Speed Limiter.
1. "CAR"
▷ Cruise control.
2. "Settings"
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐
tion ACC. 3. "Driver Assistance"
The speed value is suggested as the new de‐ 4. If necessary, "Driving"
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
value, the corresponding system must be acti‐ 6. "Speed limits"
vated.
Safety information ▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limit

can be applied manually.
▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐
Warning
its are displayed in the instrument cluster
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the without being applied.
▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist will be switched
off.
238
Displays in the instrument ▷ Before a curve.

cluster
Adjustment
A message is indicated in the instrument cluster
when the system and cruise control are acti‐ Via iDrive:
vated. 1. "CAR"
Symbol Function 2. "Settings"
Depending on the equipment ver‐ 3. "Driver Assistance"

sion, the indicator light illuminates 4. If necessary, "Driving"
green, together with the symbol for 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
a cruise control system:
6. "adjust to route"
Speed Limit Assist is active and
detected speed limits can be ap‐
System limits
plied manually for the displayed
system. Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed Limit
Info system.
Detected change of a speed limit
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info,
with immediate effect.
refer to page 164.
Indicator light illuminates green: Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for
the detected speed limit can be the Active Cruise Control ACC.
applied with the SET button.
As soon as the speed limit has
been applied, a green checkmark
Steering and traffic jam
is displayed. assistant
Apply detected speed limit Concept

manually The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐
A detected speed limit can be applied to cruise hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐
control manually. tem executes supporting steering movements,
for instance when driving in a curve.
As soon as the SET icon lights up,
press the button. General information
The system determines the position of the lane
Adapting to the route markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five
radar sensors and a camera.
Concept Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
The system can be configured so that the vehi‐ self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
cle adapts the speed automatically to the route. front.
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
following situations, if necessary: the steering wheel is being touched.
▷ Before making turns.
▷ Before a traffic circle.
239
Safety information
Warning
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Front side bumper.
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Steering and traffic jam assistant on/

off. Rear bumper.
Switch function on.
Radar sensors Camera

The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.

Front center bumper. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
240
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐

ing on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking trol and steering and traffic jam assistant.
on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐
The selected function is shown in green.
tected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
rently used.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane. Switching on
▷ Turn signal switched off.
1. Press the button on the steering
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
wheel.
complete.
▷ Cruise control with distance control active. 2. Adjust the steering and traffic jam
▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened. assistant if necessary.
▷ Approach control warning. Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
▷ Person warning. The system is on standby and does not
▷ Side collision mitigation. manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all

Switching on/off function conditions are fulfilled.
Assisted Driving Mode Steering wheel symbol lights up green.

The system is active.
General information
With the system switched on, the person warn‐
This button is used to switch the config‐ ing with City braking function and the side colli‐
ured function on and off. sion mitigation are active.
The button can be used to set the pri‐

Switching off
marily used function.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Set function
The indicator goes out.
1. When the system is active, press the The system does not perform supportive steer‐
button repeatedly until the desired function is ing wheel movements.
selected in the function bar. The function bar
for Assisted Driving mode is displayed at the Interrupting automatically
bottom of the instrument cluster.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐ ▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
trol. ▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐ ▷ When you manipulate steering.
241
▷ When leaving own lane. Symbol Description

▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
The hands are not grasping the
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐ steering wheel. The system is
tected and there is no vehicle driving in front. still active.
▷ When Active Cruise Control ACC is inter‐
Red steering wheel symbol and
rupted.
a signal sounds:
▷ If the safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐
The hands are not grasping the
tened.
steering wheel. System interrup‐
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. tion is imminent.
The system is on standby and does not The system reduces the speed
manipulate steering. to a standstill if applicable.
System activates automatically as soon as all It is possible that the system will
function conditions are fulfilled. not execute any supporting
steering movements.
cluster Displays in the instrument
cluster
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby. Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated. Green steering wheel symbol:
The system supports the driver The system is activated.

in keeping the vehicle within the
Yellow steering wheel symbol
lane.
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
Yellow flashing steering wheel ble:
symbol: System interruption is imminent.
Lane marking driven over.
Green steering wheel symbol
The steering wheel vibrates and lane marking symbol:
where applicable.
The system supports the driver
Yellow steering wheel symbol in keeping the vehicle within the
and a signal sounds, if applica‐ lane.
ble:
System interruption is imminent.
Steering wheel symbol flashes

red, signal sounds:
System is switching off.
242
Symbol Description The steering wheel displays can be switched

on/off if required.
Green steering wheel symbol,
Via iDrive:
gray lane marking symbol:
No lane marking detected, the 1. "CAR"
vehicle follows the vehicle 2. "Settings"
ahead. 3. "Driver Assistance"
The limits of steering support 4. "Steering wheel feedback"
when cornering may have been
5. "Light elements"
reached.
Yellow steering wheel symbol: Displays in the Head-up Display

The hands are not grasping the All system information can also be displayed in
steering wheel. The system is the Head-up Display.
still active.
Lane change assistant
Red steering wheel symbol and
a signal sounds: Concept
The hands are not grasping the The system additionally supports the driver when
steering wheel. System interrup‐ changing lanes on multilane roads.
tion is imminent.
It is possible that the system will Functional requirements
not execute any supporting ▷ The functional requirements of the steering
steering movements. and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled, refer to
With Active Cruise Control, the page 240.
system may reduce the speed. ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists and with physical barriers to oncoming
Displays on the steering wheel traffic, such as crash barriers.
▷ Lane markings have been detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Switching the function on/off

The lane change assistant can be switched on/
off.
Via iDrive:
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate 1. "CAR"
analogously to the displays in the instrument 2. "Settings"
cluster:
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
4. If necessary, "Driving"
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
243
5. "Steering Assistance" Displays in the instrument cluster

6. "Automatic Lane Change"
Symbol Description
Changing lanes Green steering wheel symbol.
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits Gray line for lane marking on the
changing lanes. appropriate side.
2. Press the turn indicator lever in the required Green arrow symbol for lane-
direction to the pressure point for signaling changing.
briefly.
The system carries out a lane
Steering support in the required direction can change.
be detected a short time later.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
No arrow symbol for lane-
changing on the display.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Depending on country specifica‐

After the lane change, the system helps keep the
tions:
vehicle in the new lane.
Canceling a lane change Gray line for lane marking on the
The lane change can be canceled by steering appropriate side.
into the opposite direction. Gray arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Lane change not possible; func‐
tional requirements not met.
244
Displays in the instrument cluster steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Symbol Description
State laws differ and the use of this function may
Green steering wheel symbol. violate the law. Before use, check your state and
Green arrow symbol for lane- local laws.
changing.
The system carries out a lane Functional requirements
change. ▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled, refer to
page 240.
Gray line for lane marking on the
▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐
appropriate side.
tive.
The system detected the lane
▷ The function is only available on certain street
change request. Lane change
types, e.g. freeways.
not currently possible.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
Depending on country specifica‐ clists.
tions:
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
Gray arrow symbol for lane- are detected.
changing.
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
Lane change not possible; func‐
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐
tional requirements not met.
ment cluster detects that the driver is paying
attention to the traffic.
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant ▷ When traveling to countries outside of the
country of origin of the vehicle, Extended
Concept Traffic Jam Assistant must be available in the
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant supports the respective country.
driver with vehicle control in traffic jam situations.
Steering support takes place without the driver Switching on
actively steering. As soon as all functional requirements
are met, Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
Safety information will be displayed as an additional symbol
in the function bar. The toolbar is dis‐
Warning played at the bottom of the instrument
cluster.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the Select Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the with the button on the steering wheel.
The symbol for Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
is shown in green.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
245
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is System limits

shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐ General information
cle control. The system cannot be activated or meaningfully
used in certain situations.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Safety information
Indicator Description
light Warning
Indicator light green: system is The system is designed to operate in certain
active. conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
Displays in the instrument cluster of damage to property. Actively intervene as
Symbol Description er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
Indicator light green: system is
active.
Hands on the steering wheel
Indicator light white: system is
ready. The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel
contact in the following situations:
Gray indicator light: the system ▷ Driving with gloves.
has been interrupted. ▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Displays on the steering wheel Narrow lanes

When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
▷ In rescue lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate orable weather or light conditions:
analogously to the displays in the instrument
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐
cluster:
ings.
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted. already recognized.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated. Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
246
▷ Wet conditions. An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐

▷ Snowfall. pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
▷ Slush.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
▷ Fog.
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
▷ Glare. ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ Safety information
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Warning
Driver Attention Camera
Always monitor the traffic conditions.
The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
not the driver is paying attention to the traffic system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
conditions. fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
functional in the following situations: closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered ate.
by the steering wheel rim.
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
able sunglasses. Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
PDC Park Distance Control layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Concept Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you is not yet active.
are approaching slowly in front of or behind the
vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐
play on the Control Display. Overview
Depending on the equipment version: obstacles
at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the Button in the vehicle
side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by
the side protection function.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
on the sides of the vehicle.
The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐
mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
Park assistance button
247
Ultrasound sensors Automatic deactivation during

Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, forward travel
for instance in the bumpers. The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ▷ On: the LED lights up.
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
Switching on/off assistance button.
Switching on automatically Warning

The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations: Signal tones
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running. General information
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
approaching detected obstacles if the speed is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is
is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
activation distance depends on the situation tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
in question. The shorter the distance to the object, the
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐ shorter the intervals.
stacles are detected on and off. When the distance to a detected object is less
Via iDrive: than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone
is sounded.
1. "CAR"
When there are objects in front of and behind the
2. "Settings"
vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller
3. "Driver Assistance" than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant
4. "Parking and maneuvering" tone will sound.
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC activation" The intermittent tone and constant tone are
switched off if the selector lever position P is en‐
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
gaged.
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
rently used.
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on. Volume
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.
248
Via iDrive: Depending on the equipment

1. "CAR" version: emergency brake
2. "Settings" function, Active PDC
Concept
4. "Parking and maneuvering"
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
5. "Volume PDC signal" an emergency braking in case of acute risk of
6. Set the desired value. collision.
rently used. General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
Visual warning authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention.
The approach of the vehicle to an object is After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with
farther away are already displayed on the Control caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐
Display before a signal sounds. erator pedal and release as needed.
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated. If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the
vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at
The range of the sensors is represented in the
any time.
colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are
detected. The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
and parking assistant.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
of the required space.
Safety information
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as needed: Warning
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
2. For instance "Park. sensors only" traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 268: de‐ Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
PDC display against vehicles approaching in the tively intervene where appropriate.
front or rear from the side.
249
Temporary switching off Display

The emergency brake function can be switched
off temporarily:
Confirm the message on the Control Display.
During continued driving in this surrounding sit‐
uation, no further emergency braking will occur.
Adjusting
The system can be activated or deactivated. It is
possible to set which areas on the vehicle will be
protected by the system. To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
Via iDrive: cle.
1. "CAR" ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
2. "Settings" stacles.
3. "Driver Assistance" ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the
vehicle was not yet captured.
rently used.
Limits of side protection
System limits The system only displays stationary obstacles
The system cannot be used in the following sit‐ that were previously detected by sensors while
uations, for example: passing them.
▷ When Hill Descent Control, refer to page 222, The system does not detect whether an obstacle
is active, the emergency braking function is moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
deactivated. markings are shown in black after a certain time.
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
▷ When driving with a trailer.
tured.
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive
Side protection is not available, if the trailer
where applicable.
power socket is in use or trailer towing is acti‐
vated.
With Parking Assistant: side
protection System limits
Concept Safety information
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Warning
General information The system is designed to operate in certain

The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
and parking assistant.
250
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ With small and low objects, for instance
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ boxes.
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
tem’s operation and limitations. the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
Trailer towing foam material.
With a trailer, a trailer power socket in use or ▷ With plants and bushes.
when trailer towing is activated, the rear PDC ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
functions will be switched off. curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
White symbol is displayed.
sounds.
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the range of the sensors is shown as a
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
shaded area on the Control Display.
system.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement False warnings

The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
following situations: cle within the detection range:
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In heavy rain.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
coats. ice.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, ▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
for instance from passing vehicles or loud ▷ On rough road surfaces.
machines.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
or out of position.
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high rages.
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles. ▷ When the trailer hitch cover is not on straight.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
▷ With moving objects.
cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
ledges.
PDC activation on obstacle detection, for in‐
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and stance in automatic vehicle washes.
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure Malfunction
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
251
White symbol is displayed, and the range Park assistance button

of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
Camera
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Without Surround View:

rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in The camera lens is located in the handle of the
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area tailgate.
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
play. necessary, clean the camera lens.
Additionally, assistance functions can be shown
in the display, e.g., help lines.
Switching on/off
Safety information
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
Warning tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the is running.
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Automatic deactivation during
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch forward travel
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
The system switches off when a certain driving
tively intervene where appropriate.
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle
Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off
equipment: button in the vehicle manually
▷ On: the LED lights up.

The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
252
Switching the view via iDrive Parking aid lines

If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive: Pathway lines
1. If necessary, tilt the controller to the side.

2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
power socket can restrict the visibility range quired when parking and maneuvering on level
of the camera. roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
Display on the Control Display are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Function bars
The assistance functions can be activated man‐ Turning radius lines
ually via the function bars on the sides of the
Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
3. ▷ "Parking aid lines".
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed. Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
▷ "Obstacle mark.". on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance Turning radius lines show the course of the
Control are displayed by markings. smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Zoom on trailer hitch: Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Trailer hitch".
Parking using pathway and turning radius
A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is shown. lines
More than one assistance function can be active 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
at the same time. dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
253
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where Setting brightness and contrast
the green pathway line covers the corre‐ via iDrive
sponding turning radius line.
With the rearview camera switched on:
Obstacle marking 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. "Camera image"
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
System limits
Deactivated camera
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles When the camera is deactivated, for instance
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park when the tailgate is open, the camera image is
Distance Control sensors. displayed hatched in gray.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera. Detection of objects
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance objects such as ledges may not be detected by
Control. the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
Zoom on trailer hitch PDC Park Distance Control.
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
With Parking Assistant

Plus: Surround View
Two static circle segments show the distance Concept

between the trailer and the trailer hitch. The system provides assistance in parking and
A docking line dependent on the steering angle maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer shown on the Control Display.
hitch.
When zooming in, remember that the view may General information
no longer show certain obstacles. Several cameras capture the area from different
selectable perspectives.
254
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐ Overview

played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system Buttons in the vehicle
shows the camera perspective suitable for
the respective driving situation.
▷ Rearview camera: for representing the areas
behind the vehicle.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view: for repre‐
senting the areas on the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive. Avail‐
able camera.
▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic, for
instance at junctions and driveways, depend‐ Park assistance button
ing on the currently engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment around Panorama View
the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Additionally, assistance functions are shown in
the display, e.g., help lines. Cameras
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Some assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed:
▷ Side protection.
▷ Door opening angle.
Front camera
Safety information
Warning
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Rearview camera
255
Overview
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐

terior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the

camera lenses. If required, clean the camera 1 Function bar, left
lenses. 2 Camera image
3 Side view
Switching on/off
4 Automatic camera perspective
Switching on automatically 5 Movable unobstructed camera perspective
The system is switched on automatically, refer to 6 Function bar, right
page 248, if selector lever position R is engaged 7 Rearview camera
when the engine is running.
8 Selection window
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐
tive driving situation is displayed.
Function bar on the left
Switching on/off manually The left function bar can be used for the direct
selection of various views via iDrive. Move the
Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Car wash".
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ "Parking": around the vehicle.
▷ "3D view": available camera.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged. ▷ "Trailer hitch".
Automatic deactivation during Side view

forward travel The side view can be selected for the right or left
The system switches off when a certain driving vehicle side.
distance or speed is exceeded. This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
Switch the system back on, if needed. the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
The side view looks from rear to front and in case
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
256
Automatic camera perspective ▷ "Parking aid lines".

The automatic camera perspective shows a ▷ "Obstacle mark.".
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐ ▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to
ing direction. use the activation points for Panorama View.
This perspective adapts to the respective driving
situation. Rearview camera
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or era.
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view. Selection window
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
camera perspective is closed and the system lected in the selection window via iDrive.
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera.
If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐ Parking aid lines
era perspective when reverse gear is engaged.
The automatic camera perspective will be re‐ Pathway lines
tained for the current parking maneuver.
Movable unobstructed camera

perspective
With selection of the movable camera perspec‐
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a camera Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
symbol. quired when parking and maneuvering on level
To leave the function, move the Controller side‐ roads.
ways and select another camera function. Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
With xOffroad package: when an xOffroad driving are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
mode is activated, terrain-specific views will be movements.
displayed.
Function bar on the right

Assistance functions can be activated and set‐
tings can be entered via the right function bar via
iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
▷ "Autom. Parking".
▷ "Back-up Assistant".
▷ "Camera image":
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
257
Turning radius lines The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings

match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Vehicle wash view
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed

on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road. The vehicle wash view assists when entering a
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the vehi‐
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. cle's own track.
Parking using pathway and turning radius Zoom on trailer hitch

lines To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐ zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Two static circle segments show the distance

between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
A docking line dependent on the steering angle
helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer
hitch.
When zooming in, remember that the view may
no longer show certain obstacles.
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera
image.
258
Side protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
The maximum opening angle of the doors is dis‐

played in selector lever position P.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐

ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Limits of the display

The vehicle surroundings are displayed with dis‐
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle torted image for technical reasons.
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ Even if the symbols for the door opening angles
cle. do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected. play, the following needs to be noted when park‐
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ ing next to other objects:
stacles. Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Limits of side protection Control Display.
The system only displays stationary obstacles

that were previously detected by sensors while
Panorama View
passing them.
Concept
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐
cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening The system provides an early look at cross traffic
angles of the doors. at blind driveways and intersections.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic. General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
259
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in The current position is displayed.
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic 5. "Save activation point"
area to improve the view.
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front town/city and street address, or else with the
and rear end of the vehicle. GPS coordinates.
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for Using activation points
distance estimations. The use of activation points can be switched on
and off.
Press the button when the engine is run‐ 1. Press the button.
ning. 2. Move the Controller to the right.
Depending on the driving direction, the image of 3. "Settings"
the respective camera is displayed: 4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
▷ "Front": front camera image. 5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically
▷ "Rear": rear camera image. when set activation points are reached."
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐
Displaying activation points
fic warning, refer to page 268, can additionally
warn of approaching vehicles using radar sen‐
sors. 1. Press the button.
With navigation system: activation 3. "Manage points"
points A list of all activation points is displayed.
Concept Renaming or deleting activation points

Positions where Panorama View should switch
on automatically can be stored as activation 1. Press the button.
points provided that a GPS signal is received. 2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Manage points"
General information
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera. 5. To perform the desired setting:
▷ "Rename"
Storing activation points
▷ "Delete activation point"
1. Drive to the position at which the system is to
▷ "Delete all activation points"
be switched on, and stop.

Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
4. "Activation point"
260
Via iDrive: A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐

cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
era is displayed in black on the Control
2. "Camera image" Display.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast" With Parking Assistant
Plus: Remote 3D View
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited extent Concept
in the following situations:
With the proper equipment, the BMW Con‐
▷ In poor light. nected App and the camera images from Sur‐
▷ In case of soiled cameras. round View can be used to display the vehicle
▷ With a door open. surroundings on a mobile device such as a
smartphone.
▷ With the tailgate open.
The function displays a momentary view of the
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
situation.
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
open door, in the camera image mark areas that Functional requirements
are currently not displayed.
▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer to
page 65.
System limits
▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Switching the function on/off
Via iDrive:
Detection of objects 1. "CAR"
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding 2. "Settings"
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
4. "Data privacy"
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control. 5. "Configure services" or "Select services
individually"
Follow, refer to page 247, the notes in the PDC
Park Distance Control chapter. 6. If necessary, "BMW ConnectedDrive"
The objects displayed on the Control Display 7. "Remote 3D View"
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display. Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
Malfunction not be available in the following situations:
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control ▷ In poor light.
Display. ▷ In case of soiled cameras.
261
▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields in General information

the display indicate areas that are not re‐
corded by the system. Handling
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. Parking assistant handling is divided into three
▷ When other camera functions are being per‐ steps:
formed in the vehicle. ▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking ▷ Parking space search.
speed.
▷ Parking.
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
System status and instructions on required ac‐
every country.
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
▷ For reasons of data protection, the function
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
can only be used three times within two
both sides of the vehicle.
hours.
Parking Assistant The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of the following
functions during the parking procedure:
Concept
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Parking is automatic.
Safety information
Warning
The system supports the driver in the following The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
situations: driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the road, driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
diagonal parking. The system orients itself closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
with the middle of the parking space during ate.
diagonal parking.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
driving out of parallel parking spaces. Warning
If the trailer hitch is used, the parking assistant
can cause damage due to covered sensors.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. The parking assistant should
262
not be used during trailer towing or if the trailer Functional requirements

hitch is used, for instance bicycle rack.
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
NOTICE
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over ers.
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
For measuring parking spaces
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.
Control, refer to page 247, applies in addition. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
Overview 5 ft/1.5 m.
Button in the vehicle Suitable parking space

General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Diagonal parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
Ultrasound sensors width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors in the bumpers, the
parking spaces are measured and the distances
to obstacles determined.
263
Switching on and activating Parking space search and system

status
Switching on with the button
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search is

indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear

1. Shift into reverse. ▷ Parking assistant is activated and parking
space search is active.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
2. If necessary, activate: "Autom. Parking" hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active,
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and
Switching on via iDrive an acoustic signal sounds.
Display of the rearview camera or PDC view ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly
must be active. detected, the system automatically adjusts
1. Move the Controller to the right. the suitable parking method. In the case of
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In
Display: "Autom. Parking"
this case, the desired parking method must
be selected manually.
▷ The parking procedure is active. The sys‐
tem takes over the steering.
System activated/deactivated
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
Sym‐ Meaning ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
bol straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
Gray: the system is not available. on the Control Display are shown in gray.
White: the system is available but not
activated. Signal tones
System is activated.
Switching signal tone for suitable
Parking space search is active. parking spaces on/off
The parking procedure is active. The Via iDrive:
system takes over the steering. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
264
5. "Automatic Parking" Interrupting manually

6. "Alert if parking space detected" The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ time:
rently used. ▷ Press the park assistance button.
Signal tones of the PDC Park ▷ "Autom. Parking": select the symbol on
Distance Control the Control Display.
During an automatic parking operation, no inter‐
mittent tone will sound from the PDC Park Dis‐ Interrupting automatically
tance Control. The system is interrupted automatically in the
A continuous tone sounds when the distance to following situations:
a detected object is less than approx. 10 in‐ ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or
ches/25 cm. takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
Parking using the parking surfaces.
assistant ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
Parking
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐ pear.
tant.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
Engage the reverse gear and, if necessary, clearances that are too small.
activate the system or press the parking as‐
▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐
sistance button on the Control Display.
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐
Parking assistant is activated. ceeded.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of ▷ When switching to another function on the
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐ Control Display.
tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ If the tailgate is open.
The status of the parking space search and
▷ If doors are open.
possible parking spaces are displayed on the
Control Display. ▷ When setting the parking brake.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the ▷ During acceleration.
parking process: select the parking space on ▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an
the Control Display. extended period while the vehicle is station‐
The system takes over the steering. ary.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ ▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
play. A Check Control message is displayed.
At the end of the parking procedure, the P
selector lever position is set. Resuming
The end of the parking procedure is indicated An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐
on the Control Display. ued, if needed.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the
needed. instructions on the Control Display.
265
Switching off Driving out of parking spaces

The system can be switched off manually: 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Press the park assistance button. 2. Steptronic transmission:
Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to
Depending on the equipment switch on the parking assistant.
version: driving out of a parking 3. Tilt the controller to the right and activate the
space using the parking parking assistant on the Control Display:
assistant "Autom. Parking"
4. On the Control Display, confirm the required
Concept direction for driving out of the parking space if
necessary.
The system makes driving out of parallel parking
spaces easier. 5. Steptronic transmission:
The system takes control of the maneuver. A
General information message will be displayed at the end of the
maneuver.
Steptronic transmission 6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line driving out of the parking space and drive off
for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐ as usual.
trol of the following functions during the maneu‐ The parking assistant is switched off auto‐
ver: matically.
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking. Back-up assistant
▷ Changing the gears.
Concept
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can The system supports the driver when driving in
drive out of the parking space without further reverse, for instance when driving out of tight or
steering movements. confusing parking or street situations.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the
Functional requirements last route. This stored route can be driven back
with automated steering.
▷ The vehicle was parked manually and objects
in front of and behind the car are detected.
The distance to a detected curb is at least General information
6 inches/15 cm. The system takes control of the steering when
▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking as‐ driving in reverse along the stored route.
sistant and an object is detected in front of The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐
the vehicle. erator pedal and brake.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐
ger than your vehicle. Functional requirements
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the
route.
266
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored. ▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving tionary.
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h. ▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
▷ The return route must be at least versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
12 in./30 cm wider than your vehicle. ing angle.
▷ When the display on the Control Display is
Driving back with automated cross-faded with messages, e.g., due to in‐
steering coming calls.
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Limits of the back-up assistant
and the drive-ready state is switched on. ▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you
2. Move the Controller to the right. suddenly encounter an obstacle, stop imme‐
diately and take over control of the vehicle.
3. "Back-up Assistant"
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is
The system takes over the steering. limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
where required. is issued and the function may be canceled.
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal System limits
and the brake.
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the Safety information
vehicle's surroundings, and if you suddenly
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Pay attention Warning
to the information from the PDC. The system is designed to operate in certain
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
reached and take control of the vehicle, such tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
as by shifting to a forward gear. spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
At the end of the stored route, a signal will warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
sound and a request will be displayed, also er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐ tem’s operation and limitations.
hicle.
Terminating the system No parking assistance

The system automatically cancels in situations The parking assistant does not offer assistance
such as the following: in the following situations:
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or ▷ In tight curves.
takes over steering.
▷ When towing a trailer.
▷ When engaging a forward gear.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ During activation or intervention by driving
control systems or assist systems. Functional limitations
lowing situations:
267
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
roads. the lane.
▷ On slippery ground. ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. foam material.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the ▷ With plants and bushes.

parking space. ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
sounds.
parking space.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
of a port.
system.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ tected at all.
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the
Malfunction
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
coats.
checked by a dealer's service center or another
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, qualified service center or repair shop.
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged Cross traffic warning
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high Concept
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other detected sooner by the system than is possible
vehicles. from the driver's seat.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects. General information
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
268
The system indicates approaching traffic. Radar sensors

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
Two additional radar sensors are located in the
front bumpers.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the The radar sensors are located in the rear
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility bumper.
propriate.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐

tional radar sensors are located in the front
bumpers.

Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
With the button
1. Press the park assistance button.

3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic warning"
5. "Activate function"
269
Via iDrive Light in the exterior mirror

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
6. "Activate function"
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐ The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as are detected by the rear sensors and your own
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is vehicle is moving backwards.
active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is Display in the PDC Park Distance
switched on. Control view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically

The system is automatically switched off in the
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐ In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
ing assistant. spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
are detected by the sensors.
Warning
Display in the camera view
General information
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
270
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your

own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
spective direction.
System limits
lowing situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very
high.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered,
e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills.
▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
ing is activated, for instance during operation
with trailer or bicycle rack, cross traffic warning is
not available for the area behind the vehicle.
271
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and ▷ With the rocker switch in the center con‐
sole.
options ▷ With the BMW display key.
▷ With the button in the lower section of the
tailgate.
It also describes features and functions that are The vehicle will adjust according to the se‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due lected driving mode at drive-off.
to the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Sport level:
Lowest driving level for driving at higher
speeds.
served. ▷ Normal level:
Standard level for normal roads and speeds.
▷ High level 1:
Chassis components Slightly elevated vehicle level for easy terrain
at reduced speed.
The chassis components are optimized for the
vehicle and its scope of application and thereby If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at
ensure the best possible Driving Dynamics. higher speeds.
▷ High level 2:
Highest driving level for terrains with major
2-axle air suspension uneven surfaces in the lowest speed range.
If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at
Concept higher speeds.
Air suspension ensures best possible driving Level adjustment takes place when all doors are
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a varia‐ closed.
ble adjustment of the front and rear axles, the
damping is adjusted to the vehicle state. Safety information
General information
Warning
Regardless of the load, the vehicle will be main‐
tained at the configured vehicle level. Adjusting the vehicle height may result in trap‐
ped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
level can be set to five levels.
property. When adjusting the vehicle height,
▷ Entry level: make sure that the areas of movement around
Lowest vehicle level setting. the vehicle and at the wheel housing are free.
The entry level can be set when the vehicle is
stationary with the following features:
272
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Overview ▷ LED on the rocker switch flashes fast: the se‐

lected level is not possible at this time.
Rocker switch in the vehicle ▷ All LEDs on the rocker switch are flashing:
system is initializing. The selected level will
be adjusted after the initialization where re‐
quired.
Automatic
While driving
In the SPORT driving mode, SPORT+ driving
mode or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers it‐
self automatically.
Setting the level When a set vehicle level is exited due to the
speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted accord‐
With the rocker switch in the center ing to the selected driving mode.
console
In the event of a flat tire
When a loss of the tire inflation pressure is de‐
tected on a wheel, the wheel load will be reduced
automatically to increase the possible range of
travel. In this situation, only the normal level is
available.
With the BMW display key
Concept
Up The vehicle level can be adjusted with the BMW
display key when the vehicle is stationary, for in‐
Push the rocker switch forward.
stance for easier loading or as an entry aid.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
next higher level when the rocker switch is Setting the level
pressed.
1. Apply parking brake and switch drive-ready
state off using the Start/Stop button.
Down
2. Closing the doors.
Pull the rocker switch backward.
3. If necessary, switch on the display on the
The vehicle will lower by one level.
BMW display key and cancel the display
block, refer to page 83.
Display
4. On the BMW display key, change to the fol‐
▷ LED on the rocker switch lights up: display of
lowing menu: "Entry level".
the current level.
5. "Height control"
▷ LED on the rocker switch is flashing: adjust‐
ment procedure active. The vehicle raises or 6. ▷ "Lower": tap the button. The vehicle low‐
lowers itself. ers itself to the entry level.
273
For safety reasons, lowering is only possi‐ ▷ It may not be possible to change the level if
ble from the normal level or the Sport the axles are limited.
level. ▷ It may only be possible to lift the vehicle level
▷ "Raise": tap the button. The vehicle will while the engine is running.
raise itself from the entry level according ▷ If the state of charge of the vehicle battery is
to the selected driving mode. too low, a level change may not be possible.
▷ If level adjustment is activated frequently in
Terminating the adjustment procedure
quick succession, the system switches off to
An adjustment procedure that was started on the prevent overheating and is temporarily un‐
BMW display key can be terminated with the available or operates with a delay. Let the
BMW display key. system cool, if needed.
"Cancel": tap the button. The vehicle raises or The rapidly flashing LED on the rocker switch
lowers itself back to the starting level. indicates that the system is unavailable.
▷ If the load is increased, the highest driving
With the button in the lower tailgate level may be locked or automatically exited in
order to protect the system.
▷ When the trailer power socket is in use or
when trailer towing is activated, only the nor‐
mal level is available.
Wheel change
Before a wheel change, deactivate the system:
Press the rocker switch forward or pull it back‐
When the tailgate is opened, the vehicle can be ward for approx. 7 seconds. After the rocker
lowered to the entry level and raised again by switch is released, the LED indicator on the
pressing the button. The flashing of the LED in rocker switch will go out.
the button indicates the level change. Activating the system: press the rocker switch
During the raising procedure, the vehicle raises forward or pull it backward for approx. 7 seconds.
itself from the entry level to the level that was se‐ After the rocker switch is released, the LED indi‐
lected last or the normal level. cator will reactivate.
Malfunction
Terminating the adjustment procedure
A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐
An adjustment procedure that was started with tem is impaired. Vehicle handling may be altered
the button in the lower tailgate can be terminated and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced.
with this button. Visit the nearest dealer's service center or an‐
Press the button again. The vehicle raises or other qualified service center or repair shop.
lowers itself back to the starting level.
Long periods when vehicle is
System limits parked
▷ It may not be possible to change the level During long periods when the vehicle is parked, it
during dynamic driving. can lower itself. This is not a malfunction.
274
When the drive-ready state is switched on with Overview

the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the nor‐
mal level automatically. Button and rocker switch in the
Depending on the state of the vehicle, raising to center console
normal level may take several minutes.
xOffroad package
Concept
The xOffroad package supports the driver when
driving away from unpaved roads or with reduced
traction. The system offers four different xOff‐
road driving modes for selection. 1 Switch the xOffroad driving mode on/off.
2 Set the xOffroad driving mode.
xOffroad driving modes and
levels
Switching on
The xOffroad driving modes can be selected
based on the ground conditions. Press button 1 or rocker switch 2 forward or pull
back. The xOffroad driving mode "xGRAVEL" is
When an xOffroad driving mode is switched on,
switched on. The LED on the button lights up.
individual systems in the vehicle are set to the
The driving mode is displayed in the instrument
best possible traction and vehicle stability.
cluster.
With the 2-axle air suspension, the vehicle level
The effective speed range is displayed in the
is set for the corresponding xOffroad driving
speedometer with a line below the scale.
mode.
xOffroad driving mode Level Setting the xOffroad driving
"xGRAVEL" High level 1 mode
"xSAND" High level 1
"xROCKS" High level 2
"xSNOW" Normal level.
General information
The system optimizes the driving behavior and
the traction on unpaved surfaces within the
physical limits. Push the rocker switch forward or pull it back re‐
It is operated with the button and rocker switch peatedly until the desired xOffroad driving mode
in the center console. is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Observe the information in the chapter Driving
tips, driving on bad roads, refer to page 322.
275
xOffroad driving modes in detail ▷ 2–axle air suspension: high level 1 is set.
All driving modes "xROCKS"

When the xOffroad driving modes are switched Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for heavy
on, the following vehicle settings will be applied: terrain with strong irregularities. For maximum
traction, deactivate DSC."
▷ Auto Start/Stop function is switched off.
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐
▷ Transmission and accelerator pedal: the shift‐
cle settings are carried out, for example:
ing behavior and response to the accelerator
pedal are adjusted. ▷ Anti-lock system: the response behavior is
adjusted.
▷ The all-wheel-drive system is set to the best
possible traction. ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control: the response
behavior is adjusted.
▷ Display on the Control Display: the power dis‐
tribution on the wheels can also be displayed ▷ 2–axle air suspension: high level 2 is set.
in the xOffroad display.
With the proper equipment, additional terrain- "xSNOW"
specific camera perspectives can be se‐ Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for
lected. assured handling on slippery road."
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐
"xGRAVEL" cle settings are carried out, for example:
This driving mode is active every time the xOff‐ ▷ 2–axle air suspension: normal level is set.
road driving modes are switched on. ▷ Steptronic transmission: the shift behavior is
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for easy set to gentle gear changes. The vehicle
terrain." drives off in second gear.
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ ▷ Accelerator pedal: the characteristic of the
cle settings are carried out, for example: accelerator pedal is optimized for gentle driv‐
▷ Anti-lock system: the response behavior is ing behavior.
adjusted.
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control: the response Manual switching off
behavior is adjusted. Press button 1. The LED on the button goes out.
▷ 2–axle air suspension: high level 1 is set. The last driving mode that was set through the
Driving Dynamics Control will be activated.
"xSAND"
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for heavy
terrain with loose surface. For maximum traction,
deactivate DSC." Display xView display
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ Via iDrive:
cle settings are carried out, for example: 1. "CAR"
▷ Anti-lock system: the response behavior is 2. "Driving information"
adjusted.
3. "xOFFROAD"
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control: the response
or
behavior is adjusted.
"xVIEW"
276
The following information is displayed:

Active roll stabilization
▷ With a navigation system: compass display
for the driving direction.
Concept
▷ With navigation system: elevation for the cur‐
rent position. The system reduces the lateral tilt of the vehicle
that occurs during rapid driving in curves or dur‐
▷ With navigation system: destination flag in ing quick evasive maneuvers.
compass direction to the destination.
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐ General information
centage.
The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication. permanent adjustment on the front and rear
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle. axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
▷ Level setting for the 2–axle air suspension. Agility and driving comfort are increased under all
With the xOffroad package, the following addi‐ driving conditions.
tional information can be displayed:
▷ With Surround View: depending on the
Tuning
speed, terrain-specific camera perspectives. The system offers several different tunings.
▷ xOffroad driving mode currently active. The tunings are assigned to the different driving
▷ Distribution of drive torque to the wheels. modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 137.
System limits Driving mode Tuning

The xOffroad properties may be reduced at COMFORT Comfortable.
higher speeds where required.
ECO PRO Comfortable.
SPORT Taut.
Adaptive chassis
SPORT PLUS Taut.
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
when using a dynamic driving style or traveling
Adaptive M chassis
on uneven road surfaces.
Concept
General information The Adaptive M chassis is a controllable sport
The driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐ chassis/suspension. This system reduces unde‐
hanced depending on the road surface condition sirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic
and driving style. driving style or traveling on uneven road surfa‐
ces.
General information
The driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐
hanced depending on the road surface condition
and driving style.
277
Depending on the equipment, the rear axle lock ▷ Adaptive chassis.

differential will be adjusted for the traction condi‐ ▷ Active roll stabilization.
tions as needed.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
Tuning This further increases the agility and comfort of

the vehicle.
The system offers several different damping set‐
tings. The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐ ample.
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol, refer to page 137. Depending on the equipment, the rear axle lock
differential will be adjusted for the traction condi‐
Driving mode Damper tuning tions as needed.
COMFORT Balanced out.
ECO PRO Balanced out. Performance Control

SPORT Taut.
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
SPORT PLUS Taut. vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Adaptive M Chassis
Professional
Concept
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional is an
actively controlled sport chassis/suspension. The
system increases driving comfort and minimizes
the lateral tilt when driving around curves.
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional en‐
compasses the following systems:
▷ Sport suspension.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
General information
For active control, this system uses the available
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐
tem or the Driving style analysis.
This information influences the control of the fol‐
lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving
mode:
278
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control
options
Overview
cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle
served.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the Climate control functions
following components:
Button Function
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Microfilter. Temperature.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Maximum cooling.
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. AUTO program.
▷ Ionization.
Recirculated-air mode.
▷ Fragrancing.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.
Air flow, manual.
▷ Parked-car ventilation.
Intensity AUTO program.
Defrost and defog the wind‐

shield.
Rear window defroster.
279
CONTROLS Climate control
Button Function Switching off

▷ Complete system:
Seat and armrest heating, refer
to page 125. Press and hold the button on the
driver's side until the control panel
or switches off.
Active seat ventilation, refer to ▷ On the front passenger side:
page 126. Press and hold the lower button on
Climate control operation. the front passenger side.
Open Climate menu, such as for

the following settings: upper
Temperature
body temperature adjustment,
parked-car ventilation. Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
Some of the functions can also be used via temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
voice, e.g., temperature. using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Opening the Climate menu
Adjusting
Press the button on the upper side.
Press the upper or lower button side to
set the desired temperature.
The Climate menu is displayed.
For example, the following climate control func‐ Via iDrive:
tions can be accessed via the Climate menu:
1. "CAR"
▷ Fragrance.
2. "Settings"
▷ Air quality.
▷ Heating/ventilation.
4. "Heating/ventilation"
▷ Seats/surfaces.
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
▷ Parked-car ventilation/heating
6. "Temperature:"
Individual settings can be entered for some of
7. Set the desired temperature.
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in‐
tensity. 8. "OK"
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
Switching on/off ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
Switching on set temperature.
Press any button except for the following:

Temperature of the ventilation
▷ Menu/Climate Cont.
▷ Rear window defroster. General information
▷ Lower air flow button side. The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
▷ Seat heating. body region can be adjusted.
▷ Seat ventilation.
280
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g. Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
colder toward blue, warmer toward red. running.
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body Depending on the weather, the windshield and
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
the adjusted temperature. ready state is switched on.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐ The cooling function is switched on automati‐
ture for the driver and front passenger. cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
Adjusting densation water develops and collects under‐
Via iDrive: neath the vehicle.
1. "CAR"
Maximum cooling
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" Concept
4. "Heating/ventilation" The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
6. "Temperature adjustment"
7. Set the desired temperature: General information
▷ Toward blue: colder. The function is available with external tempera‐
▷ Toward red: warmer. tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Air conditioning
Switching on/off
Concept Press the button.
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ The LED is illuminated when the sys‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature tem is switched on.
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
drive-ready state switched on. gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the program
Switching on/off active.
Press the button on the lower side.
AUTO program
Via iDrive:
Concept
1. "CAR" The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
2. "Settings" the car's interior automatically.
3. "Climate control" The air distribution and temperature are control‐
4. "Heating/ventilation" led automatically depending on the temperature
in the car's interior and the desired temperature
5. "A/C"
setting including the selected intensity of the air
flow.
281
Switching on/off The air flow and air distribution are controlled au‐
tomatically depending on the selected intensity.
Press the button.
The selected intensity is shown on the climate
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
control display.
program switched on.
Via iDrive: Automatic recirculated-air

1. "CAR"
control AUC
2. "Settings" Concept
3. "Climate control" The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
4. "Heating/ventilation" ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated.
6. "Automatic"
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐ General information
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
windows, upper body, and into the floor area. tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program. If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
Point the side vents toward the side windows.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ fogging increases.
densation as much as possible.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐ Switching on/off
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Via iDrive:
Intensity 1. "CAR"
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ 2. "Settings"
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic 3. "Climate control"
control for the air flow and air distribution.
4. "Air quality"
Press the lower or upper side of the 5. "Automatic"
button: decrease or increase intensity.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
Via iDrive: culated-air mode or defog the windows.
1. "CAR"
Recirculated-air mode
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" Concept
4. "Heating/ventilation" You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
6. "Level"
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
7. Set the desired intensity.
282
Operation The selected air flow is shown on the climate

control display.
Press the button.
The air flow may be reduced automatically to
The LED is illuminated when recircu‐
save battery power.
lated-air mode is switched on. The supply of out‐
side air is shut off.
Adjusting the air distribution
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
manually
Via iDrive: Concept

1. "CAR" The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" Operation
4. "Air quality" Press the button repeatedly to select a
5. Select the desired setting: program:
▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
▷ "Automatic"
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ "Fresh air"
▷ Floor area.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
▷ Windows and floor area.
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental ▷ Windows.
conditions. ▷ Windows and upper body.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ▷ Upper body region.
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐
fogging increases. mate control display.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows. SYNC program
Adjusting the air flow manually Concept
Depending on the equipment, the following set‐
Concept tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted front-passenger side and the rear:
manually. ▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
General information
▷ Air distribution.
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first. ▷ AUTO program.
Operation
Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase air flow.
283
Switching on/off Microfilter/activated-charcoal

Via iDrive: filter
1. "CAR" The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
incoming air.
2. "Settings"
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
4. "Synchronize" the vehicle.
The program is switched off automatically if the Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
settings on the front passenger side or in the maintenance.
rear are changed.
Defrosting windshield and Ventilation

remove condensation
Concept
Concept The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from justed.
the windshield and the front side windows.
Adjusting the ventilation
Switching on/off
Press the button. General information
The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct
tem is switched on. or indirect ventilation.
Open the vents and position them to ensure ef‐
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
fective climate control.
system switched on.
If there is window condensation, press Direct ventilation
the button on the driver's side or switch The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
on air conditioning to utilize the condensation The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐ on the adjusted temperature.
shield.
Indirect ventilation
Rear window defroster The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐
Press the button. The LED lights up. gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐
rectly, depending on the set temperature.
The function is available with the engine
running.
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
ically after a certain period of time.
284
Front ventilation Ventilation in the rear, on the

side
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐

row 1. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing row 1.
of the vents, arrow 2. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Ventilation in rear, center
Heating and ventilation, third row
of seats
The air in the area of the third row of seats can
be heated or circulated. The vents are located in
the storage area between the seats and in the
floor area of the third row of seats.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐

row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheel for varying the temperature, ar‐
row 3.
Toward blue: colder. ▷ Button for switching on the fan, arrow 1. The
LED lights up.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Thumbwheel for the activation of the heat
and distribution of the air, arrow 2.
Turn toward the front: activate the heater and
distribute the air in the floor area.
Turn toward the rear: distribute the air in the
storage area between the seats.
The heater is not ready for operation without

switching on the fan. After the heater is switched
285
off, the fan can be used to circulate the interior Switching on/off
air, for instance at high temperatures. To do this,
switch on the fan, arrow 1, and turn the thumb‐ Via iDrive
wheel toward the rear, arrow 2.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Rear automatic climate 3. "Climate control"
control 4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
Overview 6. "Activate heating/cooling"
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
Buttons in the vehicle for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Using the button: switching on

Press any button except for the following:
▷ Lower air flow button side.
▷ Seat heating.
Using the button: switching off

Climate control functions Press and hold the bottom of the but‐
ton.
Button Function
Temperature. Temperature
Maximum cooling. Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set
AUTO program. temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Air flow, manual.
Adjusting
Press the upper or lower button side to
set the desired temperature.
Seat heating, refer to page 125.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
286
5. "Second row of seats" Via iDrive:

6. "Temp. left:" or "Temp. right:" 1. "CAR"
7. Set the desired temperature. 2. "Settings"
The selected temperature is shown on the cli‐ 3. "Climate control"
mate control display.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the 6. "Automatic"
set temperature. Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is
Maximum cooling directed to the upper body and into the floor
area.
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ Intensity
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the With the AUTO program activated, the automatic
drive-ready state switched on. intensity control can be changed:
General information button: decrease or increase intensity.
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the Via iDrive:
drive-ready state switched on. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated when the sys‐
tem is switched on.
6. "Level"
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ 7. Set the desired intensity.
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow and air distribution are automatically
regulated depending on the selected intensity.
AUTO program
The selected intensity is shown on the climate
Concept control display.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐

trolled automatically.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
Switching on/off
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
Press the button. manually.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on. General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first.
287
Operation Parked-car ventilation

button: decrease or increase air flow. Concept
The selected air flow is shown on the climate The car's interior can be cooled or heated before
control display. driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐
pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐
Adjusting the air distribution perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐
bly heated using the residual engine heat.
manually
Concept General information

The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ The system can be switched on and off directly
justed manually. or via a preset departure time.
The activation time is determined based on the
Operation external temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure time.
button to select a program:
▷ Upper body region. ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
▷ Upper body region and floor area. and not in drive-ready state.
▷ Floor area. ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
Locking the control elements vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
Concept hicle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
The control elements of the rear automatic cli‐
short trip.
mate control can be locked.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
Activating/deactivating are set correctly.
Via iDrive: ▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
1. "CAR" Opening the Climate menu

2. "Settings"
4. "Heating/ventilation" The Climate comfort menu is displayed.
5. "Second row of seats" Individual settings can be entered for some of
6. "Disable controller" the climate control functions.
288
Switching on/off directly Via BMW display key
General information Switching on

There are different ways to switch the system on 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
or off. key.
The system switches off automatically after a 2. "Preconditioning setting"
certain period of time. The system continues to 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
run for some time after being switched off. 4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Using the button
Switching off
General information
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked-
key.
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
automatic climate control buttons. 2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
Switching on 4. "Stop"
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster. Display
▷ Lower air flow button side.
Symbol Description
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation. Symbol on the climate con‐
trol display.
▷ Menu.
Flashing: the parked-car
Switching off ventilation is switched on.
Press and hold the bottom button.

Departure time
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐
ing the vehicle.
Concept
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
Via iDrive comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at
the time of departure.
1. "CAR"
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
2. "Settings"
set.
The system is switched on once.
4. "Pre-heating/ventilation"
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
5. "Start now" of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on promptly before the set depar‐
ture time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
289
▷ Set departure times. 3. "Climate control"

▷ Activate departure times. 4. "Pre-heating/ventilation"
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between 5. "Departure schedule"
setting/activating the departure time and the 6. Activate the desired departure time.
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
riod of time for the climate control. Via BMW display key
Setting the departure time key.
Via iDrive 2. "Preconditioning setting"
1. "CAR" 3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
2. "Settings" 4. Tap on the symbol.
3. "Climate control" 5. Activate the desired departure time.
4. "Pre-heating/ventilation"
Display
5. "Departure schedule"
, Symbol on the climate control display
6. Select the desired departure time. signals an activated departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
9. "OK"
Stationary climate control
through Remote Engine
Via BMW display key Start
key.
Concept
2. "Preconditioning setting"
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
4. Select the desired departure time. perature. The system automatically cools, vents,
5. Set the departure time. and heats depending on the interior, external,
and set temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐
moved more easily.
7. "OK"
The system starts the engine automatically and
allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Activating the departure time
Safety information
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐ DANGER
parture time must be activated first. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute
Via iDrive the area in and around the vehicle or enter into
1. "CAR" the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
2. "Settings"
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐
290
tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate Via iDrive:

outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.
1. "CAR"
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐
cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐ 2. "Settings"
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐ 3. "Climate control"
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages. 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. If necessary, "Remote Engine Start"
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"
Warning
7. Confirm the disclaimer.
When stationary climate control is in operation,
high temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas Confirmation signals from the
system. If combustible materials, such as vehicle
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts The activation of the system is confirmed by
of the exhaust gas system, these materials can flashing twice.
ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no
The parking lights are switched on as long as the
combustible materials can come in contact with
system is switched on.
hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,
oil or other combustible objects. Opening the Climate menu
Functional requirements The Climate comfort menu is displayed.

▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state Individual settings can be entered for some of
and not in drive-ready state. the climate control functions.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be Switching on/off directly
switched on twice consecutively. The system
will be available again as soon as the drive- General information
ready state is activated and deactivated There are different ways to switch the system on
again. or off:
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient. ▷ Via iDrive.
▷ Hood is closed. ▷ With the vehicle key.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time ▷ Via BMW display key.
are set correctly.
The system can also be switched off directly as
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out. follows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without
operating the brake pedal.
Enabling the automatic engine The system switches off automatically after ap‐
start function prox. 15 minutes.
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐ For reasons of safety, the system can only be
fore using the system. switched on twice consecutively. The system will
Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on auto‐ be available again as soon as the drive-ready
matically to climatize the car's interior. state is activated and deactivated again.
291
Via iDrive Display

1. "CAR"
Symbol Description
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" Symbol on the BMW display
key for automatic climate
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
control.
5. "Start now"
The symbol flashes while
Remote Engine Start is run‐
Via vehicle key ning.
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
Climatization for the requested
Press the button on the vehicle key three departure time
times within 1 second.
After operating the vehicle key, it will take ap‐ General information
proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the
switched on.
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐
To switch off the system, press the button again ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.
three times. ▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
Via BMW display key The system is switched on once.
Switching on: ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display of the week of the scheduled departure can
key. be set.
2. "Preconditioning setting" The departure time is preselected in two steps:
3. Tap on the symbol. ▷ Set departure times.
4. "Activate now" ▷ Activate departure times.
5. "Start" The climate control function will start approxi‐

mately 10 minutes before the set departure time
Switching off: and continue for approximately 5 more minutes
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display after the departure time.
key. A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between
2. "Preconditioning setting" setting/activating the departure time and the
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
3. Tap on the symbol.
riod of time for the climate control.
4. "Stop"
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on once. The system will be available
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti‐
vated and deactivated again.
Observe the information about the intended use
of the vehicle, refer to page 8.
292
Setting the departure time Via BMW display key

Via iDrive key.
1. "CAR" 2. "Preconditioning setting"
2. "Settings" 3. Tap on the symbol.
3. "Climate control" 4. Activating the desired departure time:
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" Tap on the symbol.
5. Select the desired departure time. The symbol on the automatic climate
6. Set the departure time. control signals an activated departure time.
Via BMW display key
Symbol Description
key. The engine runs for the purpose
2. "Preconditioning setting" of operating the stationary cli‐
3. Tap on the symbol. mate control. The vehicle is not
ready to drive.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
7. "OK"
Ambient air package
Activating the departure time Concept
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
Functional requirement and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
If a requested departure time is to influence the grances.
switching on of the system, the respective de‐ Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
parture time must be activated first. pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐
grance, ionization contributes to well-being and
Via iDrive relaxation while driving.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" General information
3. "Climate control" Two different fragrances can be selected in the
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible
by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
The following criteria can influence the percep‐
, The symbol on the automatic climate tion of scents in the car's interior:
control signals an activated departure time
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Temperature and air humidity.
▷ Time of day and season.
293
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants, Fragrancing

for instance fatigue.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW General information
fragrance cartridges. Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not a habituation effect.
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty, Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge. switching between the fragrances.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
Safety information compartment.
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐
Warning hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can prior to the trip. The system is automatically
cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐ switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐
functions, and damage to the system. There is grancing was switched on at the end of the last
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do trip.
not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a
cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐ Functional requirements
grance cartridge. ▷ The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ The interior temperature is be‐
tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
Opening the Climate menu
▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow
Press the button on the upper side. out.
The Climate comfort menu is displayed. Selecting the fragrance

Individual settings can be entered for some of The car's interior is fragranced depending on the
the climate control functions. selected fragrance.
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
Ionization vehicle.
Via iDrive:
Concept
Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐ 1. "CAR"
pended particles. 2. "Settings"
Switching on/off
4. "Fragrance"
Via iDrive:
5. "Fragrance"
1. "CAR" 6. Select the desired fragrance.
2. "Settings" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
3. "Climate control" rently used.
4. "Air quality"
5. "Ionization"
294
Switching fragrancing on/off, The cartridge holder slides down.

adjusting intensity
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Fragrance"
5. "Fragrance"
Fragrancing is switched on or off.
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge.
6. "Level" Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the
7. Select the desired setting. fragrance cartridge.
Highest intensity at Level 3.
Display
The illustrations on the Control Display show the
actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" 4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of
the fragrance cartridge.
4. "Fragrance"
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐
grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐
ing.
When the fragrance cartridges are empty, a
Check Control message is displayed once.
Inserting fragrance cartridges

compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to

page 308.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
295
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the The cartridge holder slides down.
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the

6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐ holder.
sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
snaps lightly into place. indicated on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages.

Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the 4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
function of the ambient air package could be holder.
impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge

compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to

page 308.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken
to a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
recycling.
296
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The operation of remote-controlled systems
cific and optional features offered with the series. with the integrated universal remote control,
It also describes features and functions that are such as the garage door, may result in injury,
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
to the selected options or country versions. This garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ damage to property. Make sure that the area of
tems. When using these functions and systems, movement of the respective system is clear
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ during programming and operation. Also follow
served. the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
Concept
be controlled, the system is generally
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of Control.
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
Additional questions are answered by:
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
General information service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
Corporation.
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
297
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held

mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
▷ LED, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
Programming systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6.
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
peat steps 3 to 5.
remote control.
1. Switch on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial setup: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ led system after repeated programming, please
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes check if the system to be controlled features a
green rapidly. This erases all programming of rolling code radio system.
the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will integrated Universal Remote Control and the
slowly begin flashing orange. system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm to synchronize the system.
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
The required distance depends on the hand- person.
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
298
Synchronizing the universal remote control with ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
the system: transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system. Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
mirror as described.
gramming procedure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
If the integrated universal remote control
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
remains nonoperational, continue with the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
special features for change code wireless
for the next step.
systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
onds: programming not completed.
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Repeat steps 3 to 6.
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the If the programming procedure is not completed,
programmed function will be carried out. the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Reprogramming individual
buttons Operation
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be Warning
programmed. The operation of remote-controlled systems
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror with the integrated universal remote control,
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ such as the garage door, may result in injury,
lease the button. for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
movement of the respective system is clear
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
during programming and operation. Also follow
The required distance depends on the hand-
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
held transmitter.
mitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter. The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
Canada: if programming with the hand-held erated using the button on the interior mirror
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ while the drive-ready or standby state is
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and switched on. To do this, hold down the button
release the hand-held transmitter button for within receiving range of the system until the
2 seconds. function is activated. The interior mirror LED
6. The LED can light up in different ways. stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐
ming procedure is completed.
Deleting stored functions
Release the button.
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
299
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐

terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
Ashtray
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green rapidly. Front center console
Opening
Sun visor 1. Press onto the cover.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
side.
the ashtray cover upward.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Emptying
1. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of
the cup holder.
300
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it. Front center console
3. Empty the container. Press onto the cover.

Always empty the ashtray with the container
open to prevent contamination of the lid.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot A cigarette lighter is located between the cup
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. holders in one of the marked positions.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the objects.
There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk
Rear center console
of damage to property. Take hold of the ciga‐
rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐
dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket. The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
301
Sockets Front center console
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Press onto the cover.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
A socket is located between the cup holders in
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
one of the marked positions.
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding. Pull off the cover.
Rear center console

NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
A socket is located in the center console.

NOTICE
Pull off the cover.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
302
In the cargo area In the center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large
USB connectors, may block or damage the
cover when it is being opened or closed. There
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the cover is clear
while opening and closing it.
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo

area. Unfold the cover.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 73.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center console.
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.

Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
If the vehicle is equipped with thermo-cup hold‐

ers, a USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
303
Properties: Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be

▷ USB port Type A. maintained in every direction when operating the
device.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
Wireless charging tray

Concept
The wireless charging tray enables the following
functions to be performed without cables: Mounting position of the product.
▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐
bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐
bile devices, which support the Qi standard. Safety information
▷ Charging the BMW Display key.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to the external an‐ Warning
tenna. When charging a device that meets the Qi
Depending on the country, this provides for standard in the wireless charging tray, any
better network reception and a consistent re‐ metal objects located between the device and
production quality. the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
General information transmission, between the device and the tray
When inserting the mobile phone, make sure may impair the card function. There is a risk of
there are no objects between it and the wireless injury and risk of damage to property. When
charging tray. charging mobile devices, make sure there are
During charging, the surface of the tray and the no objects between the device and the tray.
mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐
peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge
current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐ NOTICE
lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐
The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a
porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the
particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile
mobile phone owner's manual.
phone into the tray can damage the tray or the
The charge indicator shows on the Control mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to
Display whether a mobile phone with Qi capabil‐ property. Observe the maximum dimensions for
ity is being charged. mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone
into the tray.
NOTE
This device has been tested for human exposure
limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐ Functional requirements
tance of 2 in/5 cm during operation. ▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support
the required Qi standard.
304
If the mobile phone does not support the Qi Inserting the mobile phone
standard, the mobile phone can be charged The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐
using a special Qi-compatible charging case. mum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x
▷ Standby state is switched on. 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the 1. Open the tray cover.
mobile phone.
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to with the display facing up.
a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; other‐
wise, the charging function may be impaired. 3. Close the tray cover.
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in

Removing the mobile phone
the center of the tray.
Operation 2. Remove the mobile phone.
Overview LED displays

Transversely installed tray.
Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.

The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted mobile phone with Qi ca‐
pability is fully charged.
Orange The mobile phone is not charging.

Temperature on the mobile phone
possibly too high or foreign object in
charging tray.
1 LED
2 Storage area Red The mobile phone is not charging.
Contact a dealer’s service center or
Tray on the left side. another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Forgotten warning
General information
If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten
warning function, a warning can be output if a
mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in
the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐
1 LED cle.
2 Storage area The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
305
Activating ▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register

Via iDrive: their signal boosters by calling their toll-free
number.
1. "CAR" ▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐
2. "Settings" bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t-
3. "General settings" mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
4. "Wireless charging tray" ▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http://
www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/
5. Activate reminder.
register-signal-booster.html).
System limits ▷ AT&T online registration link (https://

securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐
At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in booster.com/).
the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile
phone may be limited and some functions may ▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://
no longer work. www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-
booster-registration.jsp).
LTE-Compensator - Information Before use you must register your booster de‐
vice with your wireless provider.
and User Manual
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging
operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐
tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and
sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the
more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐
best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-
vated by your local BMW dealer.
Compensator) is used in conjunction with the
WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this You must not remove the booster from the car
booster: nor use it with any other than the preinstalled
coupling device or antenna. Any modification of
This is a CONSUMER device.
the existing antenna or coupling device as well as
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐ the use of other antennas or coupling devices
VICE with your wireless provider and have your will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐
provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐ cense.
sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐
The booster device fulfills the network protection
ers may not consent to the use of this device on
standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐
their network. If you are unsure, contact your
modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain
provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐
limits.
proved antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You Model Number: LTECOMPB0
MUST cease operating this device immediately if Part Number: 6803145-01
requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless
service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐ FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate
for calls served by using this device.
Please observe additionally the following infor‐
mation
306
BMW Travel & Comfort

System
General information
USB interfaces and fixtures for attaching special
accessories, for instance coat hangers, are lo‐
cated on the backrests of the front seats.
Features of the USB interfaces:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
Further information is available from a dealer's
or repair shop.
Overview
The fixtures are located behind the marked cov‐

ers.
Installing special accessories

1. Slide the cover to the side.
2. Install the special accessories, refer to Instal‐

lation Instructions.
307
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and Front passenger side glove
options compartment
Safety information
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Warning
to the selected options or country versions. This Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, partment can be thrown into the car's interior
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
served. cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
General information Opening
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown about the car's interior while Pull the handle.
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Closing
terior.
Fold cover closed.
Locking
NOTICE
The glove compartment can be locked with an
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐ integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to compartment.
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐
cle key can be handed over without the
308
Storage compartments CONTROLS
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is Safety information

parked by valet parking.
Warning
Driver's side glove Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
compartment glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
Safety information risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
Warning
compartments.
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ Storage compartment in
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
the center console
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Opening
Opening
Pull the handle.

Closing
Pull the cover on the handle bar back.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Storage compartment in
Compartments in the doors the rear center console
The back of the center console contains one or
General information two storage compartments.
There are storage compartments in the doors.
309
Center armrest, front Opening
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,

arrow 2.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Press the button.

Front cup holder
Closing
Safety information
Press cover down until it engages.
Warning
Rear center armrest Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
General information the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
A storage compartment is located in the center liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
armrest between the seats. and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
Folding down risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Fold the center armrest forward.
310
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening
NOTICE
When the thermo-cup holder is switched on
and the cover is closed, the thermo-cup holder
can overheat. There is a risk of damage to
property. Switch the thermo-cup holder off be‐
fore closing the cover.
NOTICE
Press onto the cover. Temperature sensitive items may be damaged
by the hot metal insert of the thermo-cup
holder. There is a risk of damage to property.
Use suitable containers only.
Switching on
Press the button for keeping cool or
warm once each.
▷ Blue LED lights up: keep drinks cool.

Two cup holders are located in the center con‐ ▷ Red LED lights up: keep drinks warm.
sole.
Switching off
Closing Press the button repeatedly until the
Pull the cover on the handle bar back. LEDs go out.
Maintaining the drink

temperature Rear cup holder
General information Safety information
When equipped with thermo-cup holder, drinks
can be kept cool or warm. Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
Safety information
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
Warning evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
Contact with the hot metal insert of the liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
thermo-cup holder can cause burn injuries. and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the metal the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
insert when the thermo-cup holder is switched risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
on. not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
311
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Third row of seats

Do not transport hot beverages.
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
The cup holders are located between the seats

Second row of seats of the third row of seats.
General information
The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐
ent container sizes.
Clothes hooks
Opening General information

The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
Fold the center armrest forward. from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
Press the button and fold out the cup holder not obstruct the driver's view.
fully.
Reducing the size Warning

To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
in in 2 steps. risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
Enlarging risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it
from the clothes hooks.
in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again
fully.
Closing
Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.
312
Cargo area CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
Warning
options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ NOTICE
served. Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Loading
Safety information Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
Warning
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
hicle.
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
mitted gross weight. amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
Warning sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
can be thrown about the car's interior while 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
driving, for instance in the event of an accident, and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of weight may not safely exceed the available
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Step 4.
terior. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
313
CONTROLS Cargo area
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how

this reduces the available cargo and luggage
Lashing eyes in the cargo
load capacity of your vehicle. area
Load General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
The front lashing eyes are located under covers.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐
Anti-slip rails
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear Concept
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
▷ Use the cargo area partition net to protect oc‐
cupants. Make sure that objects cannot pen‐
etrate the cargo area partition net.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet The system prevents slipping of the cargo in the
straps or with a cargo net or draw straps. cargo area.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps. General information
Observe information and notes on loading, refer
to page 313.
314
Cargo area CONTROLS
The system will be activated automatically when

one of the following conditions is met:
Net
▷ Tailgate is closed. Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
▷ Inclination of the vehicle by more than ap‐ right side.
proximately 13 %.
Storage compartment on
Multi-function hook the left side
A multi-function hook is located on the left and
A storage compartment is located on the left
right side in the cargo area.
side in the cargo area.
Safety information Opening
Warning
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover,
arrow 2.
Folding down
under the cargo floor panel
General information
There are storage compartments beneath the
cargo floor panel.
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it

engages.
315
CONTROLS Cargo area
Opening
Warning
Fold up the cargo floor panel. Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
Closing ment or improper installation of the child seat.
Push the cargo floor panel downward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
Enlarging the cargo area backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
Concept and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down straints or remove them.
the rear seat backrests.

The rear seat backrest of the second seat row is
Once the rear seat backrest has been folded
divided at a ratio of 40–20–40. The side rear seat
down, the locking bracket protrudes into the
backrests and the center section can be folded
car's interior. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
down separately.
erty. When the rear seat backrest is folded
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from down, pay attention to the protruding locking
the rear or from the cargo area. bracket and keep this area unobstructed.
Depending on the equipment version, the rear
seat backrests can be folded down either man‐
ually or electrically. NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
Safety information down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
Warning movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
316
Cargo area CONTROLS
Manual reclining of the backrest Electric reclining of the backrest
From the rear From the rear
Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ Pull the switch and fold the rear seat backrest
ward. forward.
From the cargo area From the cargo area
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to Press the switch in the cargo area.
release the rear seat backrest. ▷ Upper switch: the left and center rear seat
▷ Left lever: fold down the left and middle rear backrests fold forward.
seat backrest. ▷ Lower switch: the right rear seat backrest
▷ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat folds forward.
backrest.
Folding back the backrest

Folding back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seat‐ From the rear
ing position and engage it. The red marking be‐ Press the corresponding switch. The rear seat
hind the lever disappears completely. backrest sets itself upright.
From the cargo area

Pull the corresponding switch. The rear seat
backrest sets itself upright.
317
CONTROLS Cargo area
Folding down the center section age to property. Make sure the cargo cover is
securely engaged in the brackets.
Closing
Fold down the center armrest and pull on the

strap.
Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook both

Cargo cover sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
Safety information
Removing
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
Warning gage.
can be thrown about the car's interior while
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐
terior.
Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the

Warning
cargo cover out toward the rear, arrow 2.
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can jam
body parts or cause damage. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Do not let Stowing
the cargo cover snap back into place.
General information
The cargo cover can be stowed in the storage
Warning compartment under the cargo floor panel.
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be
thrown about the car's interior, such as in the Without third seat row
event of an accident or a braking or evasive ma‐ 1. Open the left side storage compartment, re‐
neuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam‐ fer to page 315.
2. Fold up the cargo floor panel.
318
Cargo area CONTROLS
3. Turn the cargo cover forward with the handle.

Electric cargo cover
4. Stow the cargo cover on the left and lower it
on the right side.
Concept
Make sure the cargo cover is positioned cor‐
rectly in the right bracket. The electric cargo cover opens and closes auto‐
matically with the tailgate. The cargo cover can
be lowered below the cargo floor panel to stow
bulky items or luggage.
General information
Items in the range of movement are detected.
The cargo cover stops automatically to prevent
damage.
Safety information
5. Push the cargo floor down and close the stor‐
age compartment on the left side.
Warning
With third seat row Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
1. Open the left side storage compartment, re‐ tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
fer to page 315. can be thrown about the car's interior while
3. Stow the cargo cover on the left and lower it injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a
on the right side. cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐
Make sure the cargo cover is positioned cor‐ terior.
rectly in the right bracket.
Warning
Pinching of body parts may occur during opera‐
tion of the electric cargo cover. Items in the
range of movement may damage the cargo
cover. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the electric cargo cover is clear during
opening and closing. In addition, make sure that
4. Push the cargo floor down and close the stor‐ the area of movement of the cover in the cargo
age compartment on the left side. floor is clear during lowering.
Installing
Slide the cover forward horizontally into the two NOTICE
side brackets. Make sure that the cover audibly Items on the storage shelf may damage it.
engages on both sides. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
deposit any objects on the cargo cover.
319
CONTROLS Cargo area
Opening the cargo cover

NOTICE When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
The manual operation of the electric cargo opened up to the automatic position.
cover by hand may damage the cover. There is To open the cargo cover completely up to the
a risk of damage to property. Use the buttons in base position:
the cargo area for operation.
Press the button.
Overview
Closing the cargo cover
Positions of the cargo cover Press the button.
The cargo cover will be closed up to the auto‐

matic position.
When the tailgate is closed, the cargo cover will
be closed completely.
The cargo cover will not be closed automatically
when it is in the base position while the tailgate is
closing.
▷ Automatic position, arrow 1.

Lowering the cargo cover
▷ Base position, arrow 2.
The cargo cover can be lowered to stow bulky
luggage.
Press the button.
The cargo cover is lowered below the cargo floor

panel.
Raising the cargo cover

The cargo cover is raised to the base
position.
The buttons of the cargo cover are located in the ▷ Press the button.
cargo area on the left side.
The cargo cover is raised to the base
position and closes up to the automatic posi‐
Switching between automatic and base
tion.
position.
Lowering or raising the cargo cover. Malfunctions

▷ If the closing force exceeds a certain value
when closing the cargo cover, for example
due to items in the range of motion, the cover
320
Cargo area CONTROLS
will disengage from the mounting. The cargo Press and hold the button to restart the initializa‐
cover stops in the guide rail. tion.
To restore the functionality, close the cargo

cover by hand, arrow 1, until it engages in the
mounting, arrow 2.
▷ Excessive or insufficient ambient tempera‐
tures may lead to the deactivation of the
cargo cover. When the temperature is within
normal range again, such as by switching on
the air conditioner, the function will be re‐
stored.
▷ The function will be deactivated when the
system can no longer detect the position of
the cargo cover. An initialization is required,
refer to page 321.
Initializing
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Drive-ready state is activated.
▷ The area of movement of the cargo cover is
clear.
▷ External temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃.
Initializing the system

Press and hold the button until the initiali‐
zation is finished.
The cargo cover moves to the different positions.

The initialization is finished when a signal
sounds.
If the button is released prematurely, the cargo
cover will stop. The initialization is terminated.
321
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
options
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
It also describes features and functions that are speed:
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
to the selected options or country versions. This 100 mph/160 km/h.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, ces.
served.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
Breaking-in period increased.
Tires
General information
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
Moving parts need to begin working together
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
smoothly.
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ time.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive conservatively for the first
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control. 200 miles/300 km.
Safety information Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
Warning effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Due to new parts and components, safety and Drive moderately during this break-in period.
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing Following part replacement
new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐
vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ ponents mentioned above are replaced.
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.
Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐
hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and
qualities.
322
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐

mentum.
General driving notes
Safety information Closing the tailgate
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones
Warning
or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
unpaved terrain. can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
When driving on poor roads addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
For your own safety, for the safety of passengers
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
and of the vehicle, heed the following points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving. Driving with the tailgate open
▷ Do not take risks when driving. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐ avoided:
tions. The steeper and more uneven the road ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
surface, the slower the speed should be.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
▷ Drive moderately.
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near
the MAX mark.
Hot exhaust gas system
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
Warning
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐
tact with the ground. High temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐
system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust
ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐
gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of
hicle's load.
injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas sys‐
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the tem, including the exhaust pipe.
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to the
wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol if available. Warning
If combustible materials, such as leaves or
After a trip on poor roads grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐
haust gas system, these materials can ignite.
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires
There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not re‐
for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear
move the heat shields installed and never apply
heavy soiling from the body.
undercoating to them. Make sure that no com‐
bustible materials can come in contact with hot
323
vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during Safety information

parking.
NOTICE
Mobile communication devices When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
in the vehicle ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
Warning driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐ mum indicated water level and the maximum
fluence one another. There is radiation due to speed for driving through water.
the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior use Braking safely
only mobile phones with direct connections to
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual General information
interference and deflect the radiation from the The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock Brake
car's interior. System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such.
Hydroplaning
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
form between the tires and road surface.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brake
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
System ABS is in its active mode.
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
brake the vehicle. discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐
tional noises have no effect on the performance
Driving through water and operational reliability of the brake.
General information Objects in the area around the

pedals
When driving through water, follow the following:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
Warning
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm. Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
324
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
curely fastened again after they were removed, Brake disc corrosion
for instance for cleaning. Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
circumstances:
Driving in wet conditions
▷ Low mileage.
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
tly press the brake pedal every few miles. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
The heat generated during braking dries brake ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
discs and brake pads and protects them against agents.
corrosion. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
In this way braking efficiency will be available pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
when you need it. generally this cannot be corrected.
Hills Condensation water under the

parked vehicle
General information When using the automatic climate control, con‐
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear densation water develops and collects under‐
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the neath the vehicle.
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
ciency. Flag bracket
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if Safety information
needed.
NOTICE
Safety information
At high speeds, a mounted flag can cause
damage to the vehicle, the flag bracket, and the
Warning flag itself. There is a risk of damage to property.
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph / 130 km/h.
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and Remove flag before trips at high speeds.
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system.
Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched off,
safety functions, for instance engine braking ef‐
fect, braking assistance and steering assis‐
tance, may not be available. There is a risk of
accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or
with the engine switched off.
325
Overview ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads

and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
The flag bracket is located on the side of the ve‐
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
hicle.
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
Mounting path of the tailgate.
1. Remove the protective cap. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
2. Insert flag horizontally. tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
3. Turn the flag clockwise by 90° to lock the gently.
flag.
Driving on racetracks
Roof-mounted luggage
rack Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in motor
General information sport type competition. Excessive race track
Installation only possible with roof rack. operation in the limit range can result in the
sudden failure or malfunction of components.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
There is a risk of accident. Do not operate the
vehicle excessively in the limit range. Pay atten‐
Mounting tion to anomalies of the vehicle, for instance
Follow the installation instructions of the roof brake grinding, and stop race track operation
rack. where required.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
Loading wear is not covered by the warranty.
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
326
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Trailer towing
Vehicle features and Loading
options Distribute cargo as evenly as possible on the
cargo area.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Stow the load as low and close to the trailer axle
cific and optional features offered with the series. as possible. A low center of gravity in the trailer
It also describes features and functions that are increases the driving safety of the entire vehicle-
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due trailer combination.
to the selected options or country versions. This Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ weight of the trailer and the permissible trailer
tems. When using these functions and systems, load of the vehicle. The smaller value applies in
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ each case.
served.
Tire inflation pressure
General information Note the tire inflation pressure of the vehicle and
trailer.
The permissible trailer loads, axle loads, drawbar For the vehicle, the tire inflation pressure for
node weights, and the permissible gross vehicle higher loads applies.
weight are specified in the technical data. Information regarding the tire inflation pressure,
The vehicle is equipped with an enhanced sus‐ refer to page 340.
pension system on the rear axle and, depending For the trailer, the specifications of the manufac‐
on the vehicle type, with a more powerful cooling turer apply.
system.
When the trailer power socket is in use, the vehi‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM
cle will be raised or lowered to the normal level After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
automatically. The adjustment to the normal level hitching/unhitching a trailer, initialize the Flat Tire
can occur when the trailer power socket is plug‐ Monitor, refer to page 366.
ged in or when driving off.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Before driving After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
hitching/unhitching a trailer, reset the Tire Pres‐
sure Monitor, refer to page 359.
Drawbar nose weight
The maximum load of the towing vehicle is low‐ Exterior mirrors
ered by the weight of the trailer hitch and the
Exterior mirrors, which allow the driver to see
drawbar nose weight. The drawbar nose weight
both rear corners of the trailer, are available as
increases the vehicle weight. Do not exceed the
special accessories from a dealer’s service cen‐
approved gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
hicle.
shop.
327
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Power consumption Adapt your speed when driving with a trailer.

Immediately brake in the case of swinging. Ap‐
General information ply necessary steering corrections as carefully
as possible.
Before starting to drive, check the function of the
trailer tail lights.
Keep the activation times of the electronic sys‐
Warning
tems/power consumers short when towing a
camper to save the vehicle battery power. The tire inflation pressure must be adjusted to
the increased axle load in trailer towing. Driving
Trailer tail lights with too low tire inflation pressure can damage
the tires. There may be a risk of accident or risk
▷ Turn signals/brake lights: 54 watts per side.
of damage to property. Do not exceed a speed
▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total. of 60 mph / 100 km/h. Increase the tire inflation
▷ Backup light: 54 watts in total. pressure of the towing vehicle by 0.2 bar. Note
the maximum possible tire inflation pressure in‐
dicated on the tire.
Towing a trailer
Uphill grades
General information
If the trailer socket is in use, some driver assis‐ General information
tance systems are unavailable, or available to a
In the interest of safety and to avoid hindering
limited extent. A Check Control message is dis‐
the smooth flow of traffic, the towing of trailers is
played where applicable.
permissible on uphill grades up to 12 %.
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the
If higher trailer loads are approved at a later point
trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance
in time, the gradient limit is 8 %.
systems may have functional limitations or may
malfunction.
Starting on uphill grades
To prevent malfunctions, activate trailer towing,
The parking brake is automatically released
refer to page 329.
when the accelerator pedal is activated.
When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing
In order to prevent rolling back during starting,
is activated, some driver assistance systems are
use the parking brake.
unavailable, or available to a limited extent. A
Check Control message is displayed where ap‐
plicable. 1. Pull and release switch before starting
off.
Safety information The parking brake is set.
2. Accelerated enough to start off.
Warning
Depending on the design and loading of trail‐ Hills
ers, they may begin swinging at speeds ex‐ A vehicle-trailer combination has the tendency to
ceeding approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. There may swing more readily on hills.
be a risk of accident or risk of damage to prop‐ Manually shift down to the next-lowest gear be‐
erty. fore driving on a hill and drive downhill slowly.
328
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Trailer stabilization control malfunction. To prevent malfunctions, activate

trailer towing.
Concept Activating
This system supports the driver in stopping the Via iDrive:
swinging of a trailer.
1. "CAR"
The trailer stabilization control detects swinging
and automatically brakes the vehicle quickly to 2. "Settings"
leave the critical speed range and stabilize the 3. "General settings"
vehicle-trailer combination. 4. "Trailer mode"
5. Activate trailer towing.
General information
If the trailer power socket is in use but a trailer
has not been hitched, the system can become Mount for trailer hitch
active in certain driving situations, such as when
using a bicycle rack with lighting.
General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h while a trailer is being
towed and the trailer power socket is in use.
System limits
The system cannot intervene or not intervene in
time in the following situations, for instance:
▷ If a trailer jackknifes suddenly, for instance on The mount for the trailer hitch is located on the
slippery roads or loose surfaces. rear of the vehicle.
▷ If a trailer with a high center of gravity tilts, be‐ Information on suitable trailer hitches is found on
fore swinging is detected. the underside of the mount, see arrow.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐ Follow the Maintenance Instructions, refer to
vated or has malfunctioned. page 401.
▷ When the power consumption of a trailer is
too low, for instance due to tail lights in LED
technology, to be detected by the system. Safety information
Warning
Activating trailer towing During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
Concept caused by the exhaust gas system. Contact
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the with the hot components can cause burns.
trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance There is a risk of injury. Do not touch hot com‐
systems may have functional limitations or may ponents. Do not perform work in the vicinity of
329
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
hot components until after they have cooled Secure the trailer safety chain to the fittings for
down. increased safety when driving with a trailer.
Ensure that the trailer safety chain can move
freely and is not dragging on the ground.
Removing the cover
Brake Controller
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a Brake Controller installed by a dealer's
or repair shop.
Information on installing a Brake Controller can
be obtained from a dealer's service center or an‐
Pull the cover out of the back of the mount, and other qualified service center or repair shop.
stow it in the vehicle.
Trailer connector
The socket is located to the left of the mount for

the trailer hitch.
Fittings for trailer safety chain
There are two fittings on the mount for the trailer

hitch for securing the trailer safety chain.
330
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass
sunroof
options
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased air resistance and raises fuel
cific and optional features offered with the series. consumption.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Tires
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ General information
tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ instance tire size may influence consumption.
served.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Reducing fuel consumption
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
General information ing on a long trip.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ues. tire wear.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors. Drive away without delay
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental away, but at moderate engine speeds.
impact.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
gine up to operating temperature.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
Remove attached parts following consumption.
use Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐ driving ahead of you.
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ Avoid high engine speeds
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
331
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ Have maintenance carried out
cator.
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
Use coasting conditions recommends that maintenance work be per‐
When approaching a red light, take your foot off formed by a BMW service center.
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ tem.
ator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
ECO PRO
Switch off the engine during
longer stops Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
Switching off the engine consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ trol and comfort features, for instance the climate
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in control output, are adjusted.
traffic congestion. Steptronic transmission: under certain conditions
the engine is automatically decoupled from the
Auto Start/Stop function transmission in the D selector lever position. The
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling
matically switches off the engine during a stop. to reduce consumption. The D selector lever po‐
sition remains engaged.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ PRO tips, can be displayed to assist with a fuel-
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds efficient driving style.
of switching off the engine. The achieved extended range is displayed in the
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined instrument cluster as bonus range.
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors. General information
The system includes the following
Switch off any functions that are EfficientDynamics functions and
not currently needed EfficientDynamics displays:
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ ▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control.
crease fuel consumption, especially in city and ▷ ECO PRO climate control.
stop-and-go traffic.
▷ ECO PRO light and sight.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
▷ Coasting driving condition.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
▷ Driving style analysis.
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
or completely.
332
Overview ▷ "ECO PRO climate control"

▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
ECO PRO limit

▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
Button
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Notification at:"
Activating ECO PRO Select the desired speed.
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Coasting
Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the
engine and coasting with the engine idling.
Configuring ECO PRO
INDIVIDUAL ECO PRO seat climate control
The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
Via the Driving Dynamics Control ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
1. Activate ECO PRO. is activated.
ECO PRO climate control
Via iDrive Climate control is set to be efficient.
1. "CAR" This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from
2. "Settings" the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on consump‐
3. "Driving mode"
tion.
5. Select the desired setting. ECO PRO light and sight
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
rently used. window defroster is reduced.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO Resetting the settings

functions Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐ settings:
vated/deactivated: "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
▷ "ECO PRO speed"
▷ "Coasting"
▷ "ECO PRO seat heating"
333
Display in the instrument cluster If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between
the average consumption and the current con‐
General information sumption is colored red.
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the In addition, the following information is displayed,
display switches to a special configuration. depending on the situation:
▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐
ECO PRO bonus range tance driven while coasting.
A modified driving style helps you ▷ The total time that the engine has been
extend your driving range. switched off during automatic engine stops.
The range extension can be dis‐ ▷ A gear shift indicator recommending the use
played as the bonus range in the of a more efficient gear.
instrument cluster.
The efficiency display includes the bonus range. Indications on the Control
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current
Display
driving style is inefficient.
General information
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
for efficient driving are met. Information about the current effectiveness of
the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as en‐
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐ ergy flow.
pend on the settings of the trip data.
Displaying energy flow information
Consumption display Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
3. "Energy flow"
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
A pointer in the consumption display informs
about the current driving style:
Coasting
▷ The current consumption in relation to the
average consumption is displayed.
Concept
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐ Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
ing. cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
selector lever position. The vehicle continues
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when
traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
accelerating.
sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐
gaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
334
As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator Display

pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.
General information The coasting distance traveled is indicated
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐ in coasting mode.
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO Indications on the Control Display
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics The coasting mode is displayed under energy
Control. flow while driving.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use The distance traveled in coasting mode is dis‐
the function often and supports the efficient ef‐ played in the trip data.
fect of coasting.
The function is available in the speed range from
approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.
The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed or the
accelerator pedal is released.
▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly Color code blue: coasting mode.
depressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position Displaying energy flow information
D. Via iDrive:
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
1. "CAR"
temperature.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
ACC, not activated. 3. "Energy flow"
Operation via shift paddles System limits

The function is not available under one of the fol‐
Concept lowing conditions.
The coasting driving condition can be influenced ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
with the shift paddles. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
Activating/deactivating coasting via ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or
shift paddles vehicle electrical system drawing excessive
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right current.
shift paddle. ▷ Trailer towing.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control activated
shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
335
Driving style analysis

Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐
justing your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
play.
The function is available in ECO PRO driving
mode.
Calling up the Driving style

analysis
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
3. "Driving style analysis"

The display of the Driving style analysis shows
the efficiency of the Driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the more
bars are displayed in color and the faster the bo‐
nus range increases.
In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be dis‐
played with an inefficient driving style.
336
337
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
options
NOTICE
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ With a driving range of less than
cific and optional features offered with the series. 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
It also describes features and functions that are sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
to the selected options or country versions. This property. Refuel promptly.
NOTICE
served.
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
Follow the following when surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
refueling is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to Fuel cap
page 378, prior to refueling.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
Opening
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes: 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
338
Refueling MOBILITY
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with
an electrical fault.
339
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure
specifications
options
In the tire inflation pressure table
cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
It also describes features and functions that are page 342, contains all tire inflation pressure
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
to the selected options or country versions. This ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
served. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
On the Control Display

General information
The current tire inflation pressure values and the
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure intended tire inflation pressure values for the
influence the following: mounted tires can be displayed on the Control
▷ The service life of the tires. Display.
▷ Road safety. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
▷ Driving comfort. tire sizes must be stored in the system and must
have been set for the mounted tires.
▷ Fuel consumption.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated on each tire.
Safety information
The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure Checking the tire inflation
may heat up significantly and sustain damage. pressure
This will have a negative impact on aspects of
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
General information
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ pressure increases with the tire temperature.
fore a long trip. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
340
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation After correcting the tire inflation

pressure specifications in the tire pressure
inflation pressure table With runflat tires:
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
bient temperature. The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied
automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
tings have been made.
the tires are cold, i.e.:
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
▷ A driving distance of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
has not been exceeded.
Pressure Monitor TPM.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip. Tire inflation pressures up to
Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐ 100 mph/160 km/h
gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and cor‐
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
rect it as needed.
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
levels for the mounted tires. page 342, and adjust as necessary.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
Checking using the tire inflation

pressure specifications on the These pressure values can also be found on the
Control Display tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐
sure levels deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual
tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐
tended tire inflation pressure.
341
Tire inflation pressure values up Tire size Pressure specifications

to 100 mph/160 km/h in bar/PSI
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 45

X5 sDrive40i, X5 xDrive40i, with two 21 111 V XL M
rows of seats +S
Tire size Pressure specifications Emergency Speed up to a max. of

in bar/PSI wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
Specifications in
114 M
bar/PSI with cold
tires
X5 sDrive40i, X5 xDrive40i, with
three rows of seats
265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
H XL A/S Tire size Pressure specifications
275/45 R 20 110 in bar/PSI
H XL A/S
Specifications in
255/55 R 18 109 bar/PSI with cold
W XL tires
265/50 R 19 110
H XL M+S
265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
275/45 R 20 110
H M+S XL A/S
V XL M+S
275/45 R 20 110
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 - H M+S XL A/S
20 110 Y XL
255/55 R 18 109
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39 W XL
20 112 Y XL 265/50 R 19 110
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - H XL M+S
21 107 Y XL 275/45 R 20 110
V XL M+S
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
21 111 Y XL Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
20 110 Y XL
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -
22 104 Y XL Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39
112 Y XL
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45
22 107 Y XL Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
21 107 Y XL
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
21 107 V XL M Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42
+S 111 Y XL
342
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -

21 107 V M+S XL 21 107 V XL M
+S
Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 45
111 V M+S XL Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
21 111 V XL M
X5 xDrive50i +S
Emergency Speed up to a max. of

Tire size Pressure specifications wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
in bar/PSI
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
Specifications in 114 M
bar/PSI with cold
tires X5 M50i
Tire size Pressure specifications

265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
in bar/PSI
H M+S XL A/S
275/45 R 20 110 Specifications in
H M+S XL A/S bar/PSI with
cold tires
255/55 R 18 109
W XL
265/50 R 19 110 275/45 R 20 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
H XL M+S 110 H XL A/S
275/45 R 20 110 275/45 R 20 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
V XL M+S 110 V XL M+S
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 - Front: 275/40 R 2.5 / 36 -
20 110 Y XL 21 107 Y XL
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39 Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
20 112 Y XL 21 111 Y XL
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - Front: 275/35 R 2.7 / 39 -
21 107 Y XL 22 104 Y XL
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42 Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45
21 111 Y XL 22 107 Y XL
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 - Front: 275/40 R 2.5 / 36 -
22 104 Y XL 21 107 V XL M
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45 +S
22 107 Y XL
343

Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42 Specifications in

21 111 V XL M bar/PSI with cold
+S tires

wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h 265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60 H XL A/S
114 M 275/45 R 20 110
H XL A/S
Tire inflation pressures at max. 255/55 R 18 109
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h W XL
265/50 R 19 110
H XL M+S
Warning
275/45 R 20 110
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
V XL M+S
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐ Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant 20 110 Y XL
table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
damage and accidents could occur. Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39
20 112 Y XL
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐ Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in 21 107 Y XL
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 344, and adjust as necessary. Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
21 111 Y XL
Tire inflation pressure values Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -
over 100 mph/160 km/h 22 104 Y XL
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45

X5 xDrive40i, X5 sDrive40i, with two 22 107 Y XL
rows of seats
Without high-speed tuning feature Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 -
21 107 V XL M
+S
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45

21 111 V XL M
+S

wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M
344
With high-speed tuning feature X5 xDrive40i, X5 sDrive40i, with

Tire size Pressure specifications three rows of seats
in bar/PSI Without high-speed tuning feature
Specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications

bar/PSI with cold in bar/PSI
tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
265/50 R 19 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 tires
110 H XL M+S
275/45 R 20 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

110 V XL M+S H XL A/S
275/45 R 20 110
255/55 R 18 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49
H XL A/S
109 W XL
255/55 R 18 109
Front: 275/45 R 2.8 / 41 - W XL
20 110 Y XL
265/50 R 19 110
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.1 / 45 H XL M+S
20 112 Y XL 275/45 R 20 110
Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 - V XL M+S
21 107 Y XL Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45 20 110 Y XL
21 111 Y XL Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39
Front: 275/35 R 2.8 / 41 - 112 Y XL
22 104 Y XL Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.3 / 48 21 107 Y XL
22 107 Y XL Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42
Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 - 111 Y XL
21 107 V XL M Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 -
+S 21 107 V XL M+S
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.3 / 48 Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 3.1 / 45
21 111 V XL M 111 V XL M+S
+S
Emergency Speed up to a max. of With high-speed tuning feature

T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M
345

Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
265/50 R 19 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

110 H XL H XL A/S
275/45 R 20 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49 275/45 R 20 110

110 V XL H XL A/S
255/55 R 18 109
Front: 275/45 R 2.9 / 42 -
W XL
20 110 Y XL
265/50 R 19 110
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.4 / 49 H XL M+S
20 112 Y XL
275/45 R 20 110
Front: 275/40 R 2.9 / 42 - V XL M+S
21 107 Y XL
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.4 / 49 20 110 Y XL
21 111 Y XL
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39
Front: 275/40 R 2.9 / 42 - 20 112 Y XL
21 107 V XL M
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
+S
21 107 Y XL
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.4 / 49
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
21 111 V XL M
21 111 Y XL
+S
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -
22 104 Y XL
X5 xDrive50i
Without high-speed tuning feature Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45
22 107 Y XL
Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 -

21 107 V XL M
+S
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45

21 111 V XL M
+S

T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M
346
With high-speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
in bar/PSI Specifications in
Specifications in bar/PSI with
bar/PSI with cold cold tires
tires
275/45 R 20 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42
265/50 R 19 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 110 H XL A/S
110 H XL M+S 275/45 R 20 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
275/45 R 20 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 110 V XL M+S
110 V XL M+S Front: 275/40 R 2.5 / 36 -
Front: 275/45 R 2.8 / 41 - 21 107 Y XL
20 110 Y XL Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.1 / 45 21 111 Y XL
20 112 Y XL Front: 275/35 R 2.7 / 39 -
Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 - 22 104 Y XL
21 107 Y XL Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45 22 107 Y XL
21 111 Y XL Front: 275/40 R 2.7 / 39 -
Front: 275/35 R 3.0 / 44 - 21 107 V XL M
22 104 Y XL +S
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45

22 107 Y XL 21 111 V XL M
+S
Front: 275/40 R 2.9 / 42 -
21 107 V XL M Emergency Speed up to a max. of
+S wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.3 / 48
114 M
21 111 V XL M
+S
With high-speed tuning feature
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
X5 M50i
Without high-speed tuning feature
275/45 R 20 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48
110 V XL M+S
347
Tire size Pressure specifications in Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
bar/PSI than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 - tire loads, respectively.
21 107 Y XL
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45 Speed letter

21 111 Y XL
Designation Maximum speed
Front: 275/35 R 3.1 / 45 -
22 104 Y XL Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.4 / 49 R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

22 107 Y XL
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
Front: 275/40 R 3.0 / 44 -
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
21 107 V XL M
+S H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.3 / 48 V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
21 111 V XL M
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
+S
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60 Tire Identification Number
114 M DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3819
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
Tire identification marks 3819: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
Tire size U.S. Department of Transportation.
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm Tire age
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
18: rim diameter in inches
every 6 years.
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
Maximum tire load the tire's sidewall.
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
Designation Manufacture date
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall DOT … 3819 38th week, 2019
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver door B-pillar.
348
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Temperature

Quality grades can be found where applicable on The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
maximum section width. generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature when tested under controlled conditions on a
A specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
DOT Quality Grades
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Treadwear The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
Traction AA A B C ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐
Temperature A B C der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
the minimum required by law.
grades.
Treadwear Warning
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
on the government course as a tire graded 100. tire failure.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to RSC – Run-flat tires
variations in driving habits, service practices and Run-flat tires, refer to page 352, are labeled with
differences in road characteristics and climate. a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are M+S
AA, A, B, and C. Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop weather performance than summer tires.
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may Tire tread
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based Summer tires
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
planing, or peak traction characteristics. risk of hydroplaning.
349
Winter tires ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency

to pull to the left or right.
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
winter operation. tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
Minimum tread depth ▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
circumference. They have the legally required is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. while driving, immediately reduce speed and
stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐
tor.
ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐
ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires,
but have them replaced.
Tire damage
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to tions that may damage tires, or drive over them
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ slowly and carefully.
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
350
Changing wheels and tires dent. To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer. The
Mounting and wheel balancing manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
service center or repair shop. your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have
the original wheel/tire combination remounted
Wheel and tire combination on the vehicle as soon as possible.
General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐ Warning
other qualified service center or repair shop Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section
about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The
wheel rim versions for the vehicle. wheel may come loose during driving. There is
a risk of accident. Use only two-section wheel
Safety information studs that have been categorized as suitable
for the respective wheel type by the manufac‐
turer of the vehicle.
Warning
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐ Recommended tire brands
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
erances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
Warning
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
problems, for instance unexpected loosening of brands can be identified by a star on the tire
the lug bolts and damage to the brake discs. sidewall.
There is a risk of accident. Do not mount steel
wheels.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
Warning circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
time.
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
on the function of a variety of systems, such as Drive conservatively for the first
the ABS Anti-lock Brake System or DSC Dy‐ 200 miles/300 km.
namic Stability Control. There is a risk of acci‐
351
Retreaded tires Rotating wheels between axles
Warning Warning
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing Rotating tires between the axles on vehicles
structures. With advanced age the service life with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. and rear axles can cause damage to the tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ and the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do
ommend the use of retreaded tires. not rotate the tires between the axles on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐ front and rear axles.
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
Winter tires and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
General information tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
ter or another qualified service center or repair
winter roads.
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide correct, if needed.
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐ Storing tires
ance as winter tires.
Tire inflation pressure
Maximum speed of winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
Storage
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer's service center or another ▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
qualified service center or repair shop. place.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not ▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
exceed the permissible maximum speed. oil, grease, and solvents.
▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Changing runflat tires ▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
For your own safety, use only runflat tires. Fur‐
ther information is available from a dealer's serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or Run-flat tires
repair shop.
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
352
General information Label

The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special
rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving with
a flat tire.
Safety information The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
Run-flat System Component RSC.
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐
Repairing a flat tire
stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ Safety measures
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a passing traffic and on solid ground.
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
Warning
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐ are in the straight-ahead position and engage
ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk the steering wheel lock.
of accident or risk of damage to property. Do
not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
steering corrections as carefully as possible. hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can
be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
353
General information Sealant container

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ Do not remove foreign bodies that have pe‐ ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
netrated the tire. Remove foreign objects only ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
when they are visibly protruding from the tire. Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
Compressor
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the elec‐
tronics checked and replaced at the next op‐
portunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
The Mobility System is in the left storage com‐
partment of the cargo area. Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
354
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels 2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of
are in the straight-ahead position and engage the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on
Safety information the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐
gages audibly.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container

onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
355
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the Removing and stowing the sealant
plug into the power socket inside the vehicle. container
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is

6. With standby state switched on or the engine not reached
running, switch on the compressor.
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill

the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point. 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
side the vehicle.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
5. With standby state switched on or the engine
When the tire pressure does not reach at
least 2 bar, contact a manufacturer service
356
center or another qualified service center or 3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
repair shop. side the vehicle.
When a tire pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar:
reached
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state switched on or the engine
pressor from the tire valve.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
inside the vehicle.
button on the compressor.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to pressor from the tire valve.
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
inside the vehicle.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Continuing the trip
Adjustment Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. Stop at a suitable location.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 366.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
page 359.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System promptly.
357
Snow chains Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after

mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in
incorrect readings.
Safety information Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐
Warning sult in incorrect readings.
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐ When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐ Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of forward momentum.
accident or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated Maximum speed with snow
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of chains
snow chains.
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Warning Rear axle steering during

Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage operation with snow chains
tires and vehicle components. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property. General information
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels
ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according
when operating with snow chains, rear axle
to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
steering of the integral active steering must be
switched off when snow chains are mounted.
Fine-link snow chains
Safety information
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the Warning
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended When rear axle steering is switched on and
as road-safe and suitable. snow chains are mounted, there can be contact
Information regarding suitable snow chains is between snow chains and the chassis. There
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
other qualified service center or repair shop. property. With mounted snow chains, switch off
the rear axle steering.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
Switching off rear axle steering
with the tires of the following size:
The rear axle steering is switched off by specify‐
▷ 255/55 R18.
ing that snow chains are installed.
▷ 265/50 R19.
Via iDrive:
▷ 275/45 R20.
1. "CAR"
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions. 2. "Settings"
358
4. "Tire chains" that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are dis‐
5. "Snow chains installed" played correctly and match the details on the
tires and on the vehicle.
Starting with the permissible maximum speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
axle steering will be switched on again automati‐
cally.
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the
correct details on the mounted tires must be
Concept
entered in the tire settings.
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
▷ TPM does not activate until after driving for a
four mounted tires. The system warns you if
few minutes:
there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
General information ▷ After a reset, for tires with special appro‐
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ val.
tion pressure and tire temperature. ▷ After changing the tire setting.
Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can ▷ For tires with special approval:
automatically display the specified target pres‐ ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
sures and compare them with the actual tire in‐ was performed with the correct tire infla‐
flation pressures. tion pressure.
If tires are being used that are not specified on ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle, justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
such as tires with special approval, the system formed.
needs to be actively reset. The system will then
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
take over the actual tire inflation pressures as the
target pressures.
Tire settings
When operating the system, also note the addi‐
tional information found in the Tire inflation pres‐
General information
sure, refer to page 340, chapter.
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐
ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the
Safety information
vehicle or directly on the tires.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
Warning when the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
The display of the target pressures is not a For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐
substitute for the tire inflation pressure details tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐
on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐ placement, the settings of the tire sets used last
tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation can be selected.
pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure
359
Changing settings Current tire inflation pressure

Via iDrive: The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for
each tire.
1. "CAR"
The current tire inflation pressures may change
2. "Vehicle status"
during driving operation or depending on the ex‐
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" ternal temperature.
4. "Tire settings"
5. "Tire selection" Current tire temperature
6. "Manual" Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐
peratures are displayed.
7. "Tire type"
The current tire temperatures may change while
▷ "Summer"
driving or due to the external temperature.
▷ "Winter/All-year"
8. Select the tire type that is mounted on the Target pressure
rear axle: The target pressure for the tires on the front and
▷ Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96 Y. rear axles is displayed.
▷ For tires with special approval: "Other The specified target pressures take the influence
tires". of driving operation and external temperature on
Observe further proceeding in the per‐ the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐
form a reset section. ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐
pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐
9. Select the maximum road speed that will be
tures and driving times.
used with the tires.
The displayed target pressure may change and
10. "Save tire settings"
may differ from the tire inflation pressure details
The measurement of the current tire inflation on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐
pressure is started. The measurement progress flation pressure can thus be corrected to the
is displayed. value of the displayed target pressures.
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if
Status display the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings.
Current status Tire conditions

The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ General information
tive.
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
Via iDrive: of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
1. "CAR" Control Display.
2. "Vehicle status" Any existing messages may not be deleted if the

displayed target pressure is not reached after the
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" tire inflation pressure is corrected.
The current status is displayed.
360
All wheels green After a successfully completed reset, the wheels

▷ The system is active and bases warnings on on the Control Display are shown in green and
the displayed target pressures. the following is displayed: "Reset successful."
▷ For tires with special approval: the system is You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
active and bases warnings on the tire inflation continue the reset resumes automatically.
pressures stored during the last reset.
Messages: for tires without
One to four yellow wheels special approval
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
sure has occurred in the indicated tires. General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Gray wheels Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
It may not be possible to identify tire inflation
pressure losses. Safety information
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction. Warning
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement, A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
after confirmation of the tire settings. inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is per‐
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
formed for the system.
accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
For tires with special approval: mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
perform a reset with these tires.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" If a tire inflation pressure check is

2. "Vehicle status" required
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Message
4. Make sure that correct tire settings, refer to
page 359, have been made. A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
5. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off. Symbol Possible cause
6. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset". Inflation was not carried out accord‐
7. Drive away. ing to specifications, for instance
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐ when the tire has not been suffi‐
ing is displayed "Resetting tire pressure…". ciently inflated or in the case of a
natural steady tire pressure loss.
After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire
inflation pressures are accepted as the target tire
inflation pressures. The reset is completed auto‐ Measure
matically while driving. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
361
If the tire inflation pressure is too Run-flat tires, refer to page 352, are labeled
low with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Message 3. Read the description on What to do in case of
A yellow warning light is illuminated in a flat tire, refer to page 363.
Messages: for tires with special
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ approval
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
Measure
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a Warning
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
four tires and correct if necessary. can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
If there is a significant loss of tire is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐
inflation pressure mation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
Message
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display. A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
362
Sym‐ Possible cause 3. Reset the system.

bol
If there is a significant loss of tire
Inflation was not carried out accord‐ inflation pressure
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has
not been sufficiently inflated. Message
The system has detected a wheel
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset. In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
No reset was performed for the sys‐ pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
tem. The system issues a warning trol Display.
based on the tire inflation pressures Symbol Possible cause
stored during the last reset.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
Measure tire inflation pressure.
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as No reset was performed for the sys‐
needed. tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
2. Perform a system reset. stored during the last reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too

Measure
low
Message Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 352, are labeled
sage appears on the Control Display. with a circular symbol containing the letters
Symbol Possible cause
3. Read the description on What to do in case of
There is a tire inflation pressure loss. a flat tire, refer to page 363.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning Actions in the event of a flat tire
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset. Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Measure
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. of a flat tire kit.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas For tires with special approval: when the tire
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the
four tires and correct if necessary.
363
TPM may not have been reset. In this case, Continued driving with a flat tire
perform the reset. Follow the following when continuing to drive
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a with a damaged tire:
dealer’s service center or another qualified
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
changing the wheel.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
tires at the next opportunity.
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have
the electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
Run-flat tires
The distance for which it may be possible to
Safety information drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
Warning less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat ing style is used.
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
stance, reduced lane stability when braking, and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ to 50 miles/80 km.
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
Warning as the following:
Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐ ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk
▷ Longer braking distances.
not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
steering corrections as carefully as possible. curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure

Maximum speed
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at cate the final failure of a tire.
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
364
System limits ▷ For tires with special approval: the system

was unable to complete the reset. Perform a
Temperature system reset again.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's Malfunction: have the system checked.
temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
Declaration according to NHTSA/
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
tion pressure. Monitoring System
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
tire temperature falls again. be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
These circumstances may cause a warning
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
when temperatures fall very sharply.
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐ a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐ hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
play again after a short distance. should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
Sudden tire pressure loss your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
damage caused by external circumstances. a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
Failure performing a reset ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
Tires with special approval: the system will not
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
for example a flat tire may be indicated although
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
the tire inflation pressures are correct.
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
Malfunction cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Message maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
The yellow warning light flashes and is to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
then illuminated continuously. A Check inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
Control message is displayed. It may not mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
Measure malfunction indicator is combined with the low
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, such tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
as an emergency wheel, is mounted: have malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
the wheels checked, if needed. mately one minute and then remain continuously
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
with the same radio frequency: after leaving subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
the area of the interference, the system auto‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
matically becomes active again. illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
365
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of The status is displayed.

reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that Initialization required
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
ing situations:
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to justed.
function properly. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
Flat Tire Monitor FTM When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
Concept tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss inflation pressures.
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ Do not initialize the system when driving with
tween the individual wheels while driving. snow chains.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the Via iDrive:
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
1. "CAR"
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion pressure in the tires. 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
Functional requirements 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
The following conditions must be met for the 6. Drive away.
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
The initialization is completed while driving,
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
which can be interrupted at any time.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
The initialization automatically continues when
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
driving resumes.
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new Messages
value, an initialization was performed.
General information
Status display
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor FTM bility Control is switched on, if needed.
can be displayed, for instance whether the FTM
is active.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
366
Safety information When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor FTM may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize the
Warning system.
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires or another qualified service center or repair
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of shop.
is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
mation on run-flat tires and continued driving changing the wheel.
with these tires.
Run-flat tires
Indication of a flat tire Safety information

the instrument cluster. Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐
sage appears on the Control Display. stance, reduced lane stability when braking,
Symbol Possible cause braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐
There is a flat tire or a major loss in cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
tire inflation pressure. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Measure
Warning
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐
vers. ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk
not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when
driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately
Run-flat tires, refer to page 352, are labeled brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary
with a circular symbol containing the letters steering corrections as carefully as possible.
Actions in the event of a flat tire Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
Normal tires speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in
all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐
sure gage of a flat tire kit.
367
Continued driving with a flat tire Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
Follow the following when continuing to drive ice center or another qualified service center or
with a damaged tire: repair shop.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ System limits

vers.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. the following situations:
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
tires at the next opportunity. all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
tem. advance.
Possible driving range with a ▷ The system has not been initialized.
depressurized tire ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐
The distance for which it may be possible to face.
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
external temperature. The driving range may be ▷ When driving with snow chains.
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
ing style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight Changing wheels/tires
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up General information
to 50 miles/80 km.
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
Vehicle handling with damaged tires does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle due to a flat tire.
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following: If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. center or another qualified service center or re‐
▷ Longer braking distances. pair shop.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering Safety information
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes. DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
Final tire failure
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
cate the final failure of a tire. of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
368
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the

vehicle and do not start the engine. Warning
When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
DANGER hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle of injury or risk of damage to property. When
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is housing.
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
Warning off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
provided in order to perform a wheel change in property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
signed for frequent use; for example, changing on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐ a dealer’s service center or another qualified
quently may cause it to become jammed or service center or repair shop.
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a Securing the vehicle against
breakdown. rolling
General information
Warning The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip when changing a wheel.
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐ On a level surface
sistant surface.
Warning
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in

front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the
wheel to be changed.
369
On a slight downhill gradient 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ ing on the lug bolt.
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of Preparing the vehicle
both the front and rear axles against the rolling
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
direction.
at a safe distance from traffic.
Lug bolt lock ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
Concept
position P.
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
which matches the coding.
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
Overview guardrail.
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Deactivate the air suspension level adjust‐
ment, refer to page 272.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.

▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
370
Jacking points for the vehicle Jacking up the vehicle

jack
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,

and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ your other hand, arrow 2.
cated at the indicated positions.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐

cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
371
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle Mounting a wheel

jack crank or lever clockwise.
Warning
Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section
wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The
wheel may come loose during driving. There is
a risk of accident. Use only two-section wheel
studs that have been categorized as suitable
for the respective wheel type by the manufac‐
turer of the vehicle.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or 1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
lever with one hand. 2. Remove the wheel.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
vertically and at a right angle beneath the and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
jacking point. wise pattern until hand-tight.
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used as
well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands cle.
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is portunity and correct as needed.
with the entire surface on the ground and the 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
above ground.
372
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight Overview

with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel The emergency wheel and the wheel change
can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐ tools are located in the cargo area under the
tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended cargo floor panel.
for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel
has been replaced.
Removing the emergency wheel
General information
1. Depending on the vehicle equipment:
Mount one emergency wheel only. press the button. The electric cargo cover
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the travels up.
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and 2. Fold up the cargo floor panel.
correct it as needed.
3. Depending on the equipment version: re‐
move the crossmember. For this purpose, re‐
Safety information move the wingnuts on both sides of the
crossmember.
Warning 4. Remove the tool holder from the emergency
The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐ wheel.
sions. When driving with an emergency wheel, 5. Unscrew the butterfly screw, arrow 1.
changed driving properties may occur, for in‐
stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐
ger braking distance, and changed self-steering
properties in the limit area. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
6. Remove retaining plate, arrow 2.

7. If necessary, open the lower tailgate.
8. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐
age well.
373
Inserting the emergency wheel
1. Depending on the vehicle equipment:

press the button. The electric cargo cover
travels up.
3. Open the lower tailgate.
4. Place the emergency wheel in the storage
well.
5. Position the retaining plate.
6. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.
7. Insert the tool holder.
8. Depending on the vehicle equipment: insert
the crossmember and screw it tight with the
wingnuts.
9. Push the cargo floor panel downward.
374
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Gasoline engine only: coolant reservoir, auxili‐
2 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal ary cooling
3 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck
4 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number
375
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Hood
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
Safety information closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
Warning clear during opening and closing.
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an NOTICE
accident and damage to property. Have work in Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
the engine compartment performed by a deal‐ hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
er’s service center or another qualified service property. Make sure that the wipers with the
center or repair shop. wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ NOTICE
ing components. Certain components in the When the hood is closed, it must engage on
engine compartment can also move with the both sides. Pressing again can damage the
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐ ically. Avoid pressing again.
ing and hair away from moving parts.
Opening
Warning 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
There are protruding parts, for instance locking Hood is unlocked.
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the
hood.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
376
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Closing
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
377
MOBILITY Operating materials
Operating materials
options
CAUTION
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
It also describes features and functions that are ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due stalling, especially under certain environmental
to the selected options or country versions. This conditions such as high ambient temperature
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ and high altitude, may occur.
tems. When using these functions and systems, If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
served. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
Fuel recommendation chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
General information may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell nance.
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
Gasoline wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
General information converter is permanently damaged. There is a
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. the following in the case of gasoline engines:
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ ▷ Leaded gasoline.
taining metal must not be used. ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, or iron.
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
dards: ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
378
Operating materials MOBILITY
Engine oil
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
General information
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage The engine oil consumption is dependent on
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel your driving style and driving conditions.
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐
M100. ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for instance:
NOTICE ▷ Sporty driving style.
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum ▷ Break-in of the engine.
quality can compromise engine function or
▷ Idling of the engine.
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
not comply with the minimum quality. as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on the
Control Display depending on the engine oil
Recommended fuel grade level.
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated Safety information
performance and consumption values.
NOTICE
Minimum fuel grade
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
BMW recommends AKI 89. gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, property. Immediately add engine oil.
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life. NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
ing principles:
379
▷ Monitoring. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible

▷ Detailed measurement. operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
General information
taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
detailed measurement. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Monitoring
Concept ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
The engine oil level is monitored electronically ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P
while driving and can be shown on the Control and accelerator pedal not depressed.
Display. ▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible pressing the Start/Stop button.
operating range, a Check Control message is ▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
displayed. ature.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
gine oil pressure is too low. Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
Functional requirements 1. "CAR"

A current measured value is available after ap‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. 3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Engine oil measurement"
Displaying the engine oil level
5. "Start measurement"
Via iDrive:
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
1. "CAR" a scale.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level" Adding engine oil
The engine oil level is displayed.
General information
System limits Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
When making frequent short-distance trips or played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ be added is indicated in the message shown on
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the Control Display.
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long Only add suitable types of engine oil.
trip is displayed. Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
Detailed measurement Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
380
Safety information Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 376.
Warning 2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
3. Add engine oil.

NOTICE
4. Close the lid.
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
Engine oil types to add
property. Immediately add engine oil.
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
NOTICE
engine.
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
Safety information
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or NOTICE
repair shop. Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
tives.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 375.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
381
Gasoline engine exceed the service intervals indicated in the ve‐

hicle.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you

have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
BMW Longlife-17 FE+. fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
The BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW Long‐
life-17 FE+ oil ratings are not suitable for the 50i
gasoline engine.
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
API SL.
Coolant
API SM.
API SN. General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.
Viscosity grades Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐
Viscosity grades ent colors. Observe the water - additive mixing
SAE 0W-20. ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable addi‐
tives is available from a dealer’s service center or
SAE 0W-30. another qualified service center or repair shop.
The viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable Safety information

for gasoline engine 50i.
More information about suitable oil ratings and
Warning
viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ With the engine hot and the cooling system
fied service center or repair shop. open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
system with the engine cooled down.
Engine oil change
NOTICE Warning
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
property. It is recommended that you do not additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
382
or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
only. counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
Coolant level
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
General information
6. Close the lid.
Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two cool‐
ing circuits. Always check the coolant levels of 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed. as soon as possible.
The coolant level is indicated using minimum
and maximum markings in the filler neck of the Disposal
coolant reservoir. Comply with the relevant environmental
Depending on the engine installation, the coolant protection regulations when disposing of
reservoir is located on the right side or the left coolant and coolant additives.
side of the engine compartment, refer to
page 375.
Washer fluid
Checking the coolant level
1. Let the engine cool. General information
2. Open the hood, refer to page 376. All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly voir.
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
sure to dissipate, then open it. washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between used.
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler Recommended minimum fill quantity:
neck. 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
6. Close the lid. materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 376.
383
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is Overview

regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐ The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐ gine compartment.
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ Malfunction
ervoir. The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
NOTICE +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid

for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
384
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information
options Information on service notifications, refer to
page 161, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
It also describes features and functions that are Service data in the vehicle key
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Information on the service notifications is contin‐
to the selected options or country versions. This uously stored in the vehicle key. The service
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ center can read this data out and suggest a
tems. When using these functions and systems, maintenance scope for the vehicle.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
served. key with which the vehicle was driven most re‐
cently.
BMW maintenance system Storage periods

The maintenance system provides service notifi‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
cations and thereby provides support in main‐ was disconnected are not taken into account.
taining road safety and the operational reliability If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
of the vehicle. another qualified service center or repair shop
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated activated-charcoal filter.
separately. Further information is available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop. Maintenance Manual and
Service and Warranty
Condition Based Service Information Booklet for US
CBS models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Concept Canadian models
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses Please consult your Maintenance Manual and
these to calculate the need for maintenance. Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
The system makes it possible to adapt the
for Canadian models for additional information on
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
the performance of service and maintenance
user profile.
work.
385
MOBILITY Maintenance
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Position

that maintenance and repair be performed by a
or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance
and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
General information There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger checking the primary components in the vehi‐
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ cle's emissions.
move any devices connected at the OBD socket
before locking the vehicle.
Emissions
Safety information ▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
NOTICE
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cumstances:
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ in the engine.
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
agnosis for other than its intended purpose, engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates ously damage emission control components,
risks of personal and property damage. Given in particular the catalytic converter.
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
386
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
options
NOTICE
It also describes features and functions that are Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
to the selected options or country versions. This property. Make sure that the wipers with the
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
tems. When using these functions and systems, the windshield before opening the hood.
served.
Replace front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
Vehicle tool kit arms, refer to page 145.
2. Lift the wiper off of the windshield and hold.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the

cargo floor panel. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the 4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do til it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
387
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing the rear wiper blade Safety information

The wiper blade is engaged at the end of the
wiper arm. Warning
1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper Focused laser light can irritate or permanently
blade, arrow. damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that the work on the lighting system in‐
cluding bulb replacement be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
2. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
must engage audibly. look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
3. Fold down the wipers.
Headlight glass
Lights and bulbs
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When
General information driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
to vehicle safety. light glass does not need to be changed.
All headlights and lights are made using LED or If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
laser technology. increasing humidity forms, for instance water
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ droplets in the light, have the headlights
odes installed behind a cover as a light source. checked.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Vehicle battery
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you let a dealer's service center or another General information
qualified service center or repair shop perform The battery is maintenance-free.
the work in case of a malfunction.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer's service center or another
388
Replacing components MOBILITY
Safety information Safety information
Warning NOTICE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle work with high voltages and currents, which
functions. There is a risk of an accident and means that the 12 volt on-board network can
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
are compatible with your vehicle type should be damage to property. Only connect battery
installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐ chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
patible vehicle batteries is available at your aid terminals in the engine compartment.
dealer’s service center.
Charging the battery

Register the battery to the Charge the battery only when the engine is off
vehicle and via the starting aid terminals, refer to
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends page 395, in the engine compartment.
that you have a service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐ Power failure
hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐ newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
tered again, all comfort features will be available example:
without restriction and any Check Control mes‐ ▷ With Memory function: store the positions
sages displayed which relate to comfort features again.
will disappear.
▷ Time: update.
Charging the battery ▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently Disposing of old batteries
charged to guarantee that the battery remains Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
usable for its full service life. er’s service center or another qualified
A discharged battery is indicated by a red service center or repair shop or take
indicator light. them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
Charge the battery in the following situations: for transport and storage. Secure the battery so
▷ When the inspection glass on the top of the that it does not tip over during transport.
battery is black.
▷ When the take-off performance is insufficient.
The following circumstances can have a negative Fuses
effect on the performance of the battery:
▷ Frequent short-distance drives. General information
▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a The fuses are located at different places in the
month. vehicle.
389
MOBILITY Replacing components
Information on the fuse types and locations and

the positions of the fuse boxes is available on the
Internet: www.bmw.com/fusecard.
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
390
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle
options
1. Unlock the cover of the left side panel, ar‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ row 1, and fold open, arrow 2.
served.
Hazard warning flashers 2. Take the warning triangle out in the direction
of the car's interior.
The button is located in the center console.

The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
391
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Storage Starting manually

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.
Via iDrive:
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
The first-aid kit is located in the left storage com‐
partment of the cargo area.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Unlock the cover of the left side panel, arrow 1,
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
and fold open, arrow 2.
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
mitted automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐
BMW Roadside Assistance prove this on the Control Display.
Concept Teleservice Help

Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if Depending on the country, Teleservice Help en‐
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ ables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
down. BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐
mission.
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ through BMW Roadside Assistance.
cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW Road‐ 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
side Assistance.
There are various ways of contacting BMW
3. Control Display is switched on.
Roadside Assistance.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
▷ Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 156.
▷ Calling with a mobile phone. BMW Accident Assistance
▷ Via the BMW Connected app.
Concept
Functional requirements BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐ accident.
nectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception. General information
▷ Standby state is switched on. If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
392
airbags, a Check Control message appears on

the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
Emergency Request
sage appears on the Control Display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
Intelligent emergency call
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Concept
Functional requirements In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
tem or manually.
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
nectedDrive services.
General information
▷ Cellular network reception.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐
nection with the BMW Response Center.
Starting BMW Accident
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
Assistance
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
tions.
If an accident is detected
automatically Overview
A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐
tance appears on the Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"Call BMW Accident Assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the stored
Check Control messages, refer to page 155, for
a certain length of time.
Starting manually SOS button.

BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function. Functional requirements
Via iDrive: ▷ Standby state is switched on.
1. "APPS" ▷ The Assist system is functional.
2. "Installed apps" ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
3. "BMW Assist"
the vehicle has been activated.
4. "Call BMW Accident Assistance"
Follow the displays on the Control Display. A Automatic triggering
voice connection is established. Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
393
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐ Safety information

ton.
Manual triggering DANGER
1. Tap the cover. Contact with live components can lead to an

electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED ger to life. Do not touch any components that
in the area of the button illuminates green. are under voltage.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control Warning
Display, the Emergency Request can be
If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
aborted.
rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
the voice connection has been established. ing connection.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished. NOTICE
The BMW Response Center then makes In the case of body contact between the two
contact with the occupants of the vehicle and vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
initiates further steps to help. starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Make sure that no body contact occurs.
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐ Preparation
sponse Center which serves to determine the 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
necessary rescue measures. For instance, cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
the current position of the vehicle, if it can be formation can be found on the battery.
established. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
Even if the BMW Response Center is no lon‐ 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐
ger heard through the loudspeakers, the sumers in both vehicles.
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear the occupants of the vehicle.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
394
Starting aid terminals battery, or to the corresponding engine or

body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐ let it run for several minutes at an increased
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal. idle speed.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Tow-starting and towing
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
Safety information
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle. Warning
1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. Due to system limits, individual functions can
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐ Transporting the vehicle
tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
General information
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
395
Safety information If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify

the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
NOTICE
With Safe Share function: to remove a broken-
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the down vehicle from the danger area, tow it for a
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of short distance at a speed of no more than
damage to property. The vehicle should only be 6 mph/10 km/h.
transported on a loading platform.
Safety information
NOTICE
Warning
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it. If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
There is a risk of damage to property.
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. be possible to control the vehicle's response.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐ NOTICE
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
page 147. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow truck
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
The vehicle should only be transported on a ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
loading platform. secured with an offset.
Towing other vehicles Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the tow
General information rope:
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ ▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
ing on local regulations. the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
396
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when Safety information
fastening.
▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow NOTICE
rope in regular intervals.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
30 mph/50 km/h. ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of low the notes on using the tow fitting.
3 miles/5 km.
▷ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut. Screw thread for tow fitting
Tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
in the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
page 394, if possible.
rear of the vehicle.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
The tow fitting is located beneath the cargo floor
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
panel.
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
397
MOBILITY Care
Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
options
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
It also describes features and functions that are 31.5 in/80 cm.
to the selected options or country versions. This Automatic vehicle washes
tems. When using these functions and systems, Safety information
served.
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
Washing the vehicle cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Follow the following in‐
General information structions:
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
in the area below the windshield when the hood those that use soft brushes in order to
is raised. avoid paint damage.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ▷ Before driving into the vehicle wash, make
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the sure that the vehicle is not too large.
vehicle. ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
Steam blaster and high-pressure the chassis.
washer ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
Safety information ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
NOTICE ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain

sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
tem.
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
398
Care MOBILITY
Driving into a vehicle wash with a Completely remove all residues on the windows,
Steptronic transmission to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Safety information
Vehicle care
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
Vehicle care products
gaged when standby state is switched off.
General information
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
General information products are available from a dealer’s service
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll center or another qualified service center or re‐
freely. pair shop.
To roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 147.
Safety information
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A Warning
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
the vehicle. gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
Driving out of a vehicle wash the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 38.
Headlights Vehicle paint

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. General information
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance Regular care contributes to driving safety and
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with value retention. Environmental influences in
water. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
scraper. the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
After washing the vehicle Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
be reduced. The heat generated during braking or discolored.
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion. Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish.
399
MOBILITY Care
Leather care not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets

above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
instructions.
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear
nents, such as the brake disc.
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐
face. After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
To guard against discoloration, such as from
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
against corrosion.
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Chrome surfaces
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible. Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of wa‐
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and ter and added cleanser as needed.
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
Upholstery material care
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
General information
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
cleaner.
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth or noises.
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using Fine wood parts
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
terial vigorously. nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Safety information
Kenaf
NOTICE Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing ble care products.
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro® Plastic components
fasteners are closed.
NOTICE
Caring for special components Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
Light-alloy wheels
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
400
Care MOBILITY
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
with water, if needed. in the direction of travel only.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Mount for trailer hitch

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Keep the mount clean.
Do not soak the roofliner. Regularly grease or oil bearings and sliding surfa‐
ces with resin-free greases or oils.
Safety belts Before using steam cleaners or high pressure
cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head
Warning and insert the cover into the mount.
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt

Sensors and camera lenses
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
safety belts. gent.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and Displays, screens, and protective
thus have a negative impact on safety. glass of the Head-up Display
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps. NOTICE
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
they are dry. kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Carpets and floor mats Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Warning
NOTICE
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. The surface of displays can be damaged with
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats not use any scratching materials.
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ available dish-washing soap.
curely fastened again after they were removed,
for instance for cleaning. Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐
three months, special measures must be taken.
terior for cleaning.
Further information is available from a dealer's
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐ service center or another qualified service center
crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To or repair shop.
401
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the urement method. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW X5
Width with mirrors in/mm 87.3/2,218
Width without mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,004
Height in/mm 68.7-69/1,744-1,753
Length in/mm 194.3/4,936
Wheelbase in/mm 117.1/2,975
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.3/12.6
402
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
X5 sDrive40i with two rows of seats
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,052/2,745
Load lbs/kg 827/375
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,822/1,280
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,527/1,600
X5 sDrive40i with three rows of seats
Load lbs/kg 1,246/565
X5 xDrive40i with two rows of seats
Load lbs/kg 849/385
X5 xDrive40i with three rows of seats
Load lbs/kg 1,246/565
X5 xDrive50i
Load lbs/kg 871/395
403
X5 xDrive50i
X5 M50i powered by BMW M
Load lbs/kg 882/400
Trailer towing
X5 sDrive40i with two rows of seats
Trailer load without brakes lbs/kg 1,653/750
a) Trailer load with brakes on uphill grades of up to lbs/kg 5,952/2,700

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
b) Trailer load with brakes on uphill grades of up to
12 %
Maximum drawbar nose weight lbs/kg 551/250
a) The trailer load only applies to vehicles with a mount for trailer hitches retrofitted by BMW.
b) The trailer load only applies to vehicles with a factory-installed mount for trailer hitches.

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
12 %
404
Technical data REFERENCE
X5 xDrive40i with two rows of seats

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
12 %
X5 xDrive40i with three rows of seats

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
12 %
405
X5 xDrive50i

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
12 %
X5 M50i powered by BMW M

12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
12 %
Capacities
BMW X5
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 21.9/83.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer

to page 378.
406
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the

editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after the
editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Notes: own safety: maintenance.
▷ Operation: safety: Lane Departure Warning:
warning function.
▷ Operation: driver assistant systems: parking
assistant: driving out of a parking space using
the parking assistant.
▷ Driving tips: observe when driving: driving on
a race track.
▷ Mobility: wheels and tires: changing wheels
and tires: changing runflat tires.
▷ Mobility: operating fluids: engine oil: engine
oil change.
407
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Air distribution, manual 283
Air flow, automatic climate control 283
2-axle air suspension 272 Air outlets, see Ventilation 284
Air pressure, tires 340
A Air quality 279
Air suspension 272
A/C button, see Air conditioning 281 Alarm system 104
ABS, Antilock Brake System 219 Alarm, unintentional 106
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 150 All-season tires, see Winter tires 352
Accessories and parts 8 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 221
Accident Assistance 392 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 51
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 215 Ambient air package 293
ACC, see Active Cruise Control 229 Ambient light 176
Activated charcoal filter 284 Animal detection, see Night Vision 197
Activation, trailer towing 329 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 383
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function Antilock Brake System, ABS 219
ACC 229 Anti-slip control, see DSC 219
Active damping control, see Adaptive M chassis/ Anti-slip rails 314
suspension 277 Anti-theft protection, see Lug bolt lock 370
Active damping control, see Adaptive suspen‐ Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the ve‐
sion 277 hicle 74
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 182 Approach control warning with City braking func‐
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 182 tion 183
Active M sport differential 222 Approved axle load 403
Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 249 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Active Protection 215 tertainment, Communication 6
Active roll stabilization 277 Armrest heating 125
Active seat ventilation 126 Ashtray 300
Active Steering, integral 224 Assistance, Roadside, see Roadside Assis‐
Adaptive brake assistant 219 tance 392
Adaptive Light Control 173 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐
Adaptive M chassis/suspension 277 tant 219
Adaptive M suspension Professional 278 Assistance with breakdown 391
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 139 AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 282
Adaptive suspension 277 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Additives, engine oil types 381 tertainment and Communication 6
Airbags 178 AUTO H button, see Parking brake 139
Airbags, indicator and warning light 180 Automatic climate control 279
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 282 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 123
Air conditioning 281
408
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐ BMW display key, malfunction 86

bags 181 BMW Drive Recorder 214
Automatic Differential Brake 222 BMW Gesture Control 54
Automatic headlight control 170 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 52
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 139 BMW maintenance system 385
Automatic locking 103 Bonus range, ECO PRO 334
Automatic parking 262 Bottle holder, see Cup holders 310
Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 282 Bracket, flag 325
Automatic Soft Closing 100 Brake assistant 219
Automatic tailgate 98 Brake assistant, adaptive 219
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ Brake Controller 330
mission 146 Brake discs, see Brake system 322
Automatic unlocking 103 Brake pads, see Brake system 322
Automating routines 53 Brake system 322
AUTO program, automatic climate control 281 Braking, information 324
AUTO program, intensity 282 Breakdown assistance 391
Auto Start/Stop function 134 Breakdown, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 366
Average consumption, see Trip data 165 Breaking in 322
Axle loads, weights 403 Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 217
Brightness, Control Display 64
B Buttons on the steering wheel 32
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 393
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 113 Button, Start/Stop 134
Backrest, seats 111 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 394
Backrest tilt 112
Backrest tilt, rear seats 115 C
Backrest, width 113
Back-up assistant, see Parking Assistant 262 Cable for tow-starting/towing 396
Bad road trips 322 California Proposition 65 Warning 8
Bandages, see First-aid kit 391 Call, gesture control 55
Bar for tow-starting/towing 396 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
Basic position, rear seats 115 gent Safety 182
Battery, disposing of 389 Camera lenses, care 401
Battery, vehicle 388 Camera, rearview camera, without Surround
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 395 View 252
Belts, see Safety belts 117 Camera, see Surround View 254
Beverage holder, see Cup holders 310 CANCEL button, see Active Cruise Control 229
Blind spot collision warning 204 CANCEL button, see Cruise control 227
Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 107 Can holder, see Cup holders 310
Bluetooth connection 71 Care, Head-up Display 401
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Care of displays, screens 401
Entertainment, Communication 6 Care, see Vehicle washing 398
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Care, vehicle 399
Entertainment and Communication 6 Cargo area 313
BMW Digital Key 93 Cargo area, enlarging 316
BMW display key 83 Cargo cover 318
409
Cargo cover electric 319 Child safety locks 133

Cargo, stowing and securing 314 Child seat, mounting 129
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Child seats, see Transporting children
area 314 safely 128
Caring Car 53 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 400
Car key, see Vehicle key 78 Chrome surfaces, care 400
Carpet, care 401 Cigarette lighter 301
CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 74 Cigarette lighter, front 301
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 128 Cigarette lighter, rear 301
Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ Cleaning displays, screens 401
age 293 Cleaning, Head-up Display 401
Car wash lines 398 Climate control 279
Car wash systems 398 Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ Key 93
tem 323 Clothes hooks 312
CBS Condition Based Service 385 Coasting 334
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐
Entertainment and Communication 6 ing 334
Center armrest 310 Coasting with idling engine 334
Center armrest, front 310 Combination switch, see Turn signals 142
Center armrest, rear 310 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐
Center console 35 tem 143
Central Information Display (CID), see Control Comfort Access 89
Display 43 COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 137
Central locking system 88 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Central screen, see Control Display 43 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8 Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 373
Changing parts 387 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 41
Changing wheels 368 Compartments, doors 309
Changing wheels/tires 351 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 71
Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging Compressor 354
tray 304 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
charging tray 304 Condensation water under the parked vehi‐
Chassis/suspension, electronic, see Adaptive M cle 325
chassis/suspension 277 Condensation, windshield 284
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ Condition Based Service CBS 385
ber 12 Confirmation signal from the vehicle 102
Check Control 155 Connected Command 54
Checking the engine oil level electronically 379 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
Children, seating position 128 gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Children, transporting safely 128 Connecting device 70
Child restraint system LATCH 131 Connecting, electrical devices, see Sockets 302
Child restraint systems, mounting 129 Connecting, mobile devices 70
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐ Connections, Screen Mirroring 75
dren safely 128 Consumption display, ECO PRO 334
410
Consumption display, widget in the instrument Damping control active, see Adaptive M chassis/
cluster 154 suspension 277
Consumption, see Current consumption 154 Damping control, active, see Adaptive suspen‐
Consumption, see Trip data 165 sion 277
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 214
Entertainment, Communication 6 Data memory 10
Container for washer fluid 383 Data protection, settings 65
Continued driving with a flat tire 364, 368 Data, see Deleting personal data 65
Control Display 43 Data, technical 402
Control Display, brightness 64 Date 61
Controller 43 Daytime running lights 172
Control systems, driving stability 219 DCC, see Cruise control 227
Convenient closing, vehicle key 80 Defrosting, see Defrosting windshield 284
Convenient opening, vehicle key 79 Defrosting, windshield 284
Coolant 382 Deleting personal data 65
Coolant level 383 Departure schedule, see Parked-car ventila‐
Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera‐ tion 288
ture 161 Departure time, parked-car ventilation 289
Cooling, maximum 281 Departure time, stationary climate control 292
Cooling system 382 Device list 76
Cornering light 173 Diagnosis connection 386
Corrosion on brake discs 325 Differential lock 222
Cosmetic mirror 300 Digital Key 93
Cross-country mobility, see xOffroad pack‐ Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 93
age 275 Dimensions 402
Cross traffic warning 268 Dimensions, see Technical data 402
Cruise control 227 Dimmable exterior mirrors 122
Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ Dimmable interior mirror 123
tion 229 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory
Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 229 buttons 42
Cruise control with distance control, see Active Direction indicator, see Turn signals 142
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 229 Display and input 40
Cruise control without distance control, see Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐
Cruise control 227 play 167
Cruising range 161 Display key 83
Cup holder 310 Display key, malfunction 86
Cup holder, front 310 Display key, see BMW display key 83
Cup holder, rear 311 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 176
Cup holder, third row of seats 312 Displays 152
Current consumption 154 Displays and symbols 7
Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Displays, ECO PRO 334
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Displays, screens 401
Disposal, coolant 383
D Disposal, vehicle battery 389
Distance control, see PDC 247
Damage, tires 350 Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 172
411
Door opening angle, Surround View 256 ECO PRO, bonus range 334
Downhill control, see HDC Hill Descent Con‐ ECO PRO, Driving style analysis 336
trol 222 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Drawbar nose weight 404 Control 137
Drive-off assistant 219 ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 137
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 219 Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 63 ter 154
Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent Efficient4x4, see xDrive 221
Safety 182 Electronic oil measurement 379
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 182 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 219
Driver Attention Camera 63 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Drive-ready state, engine start 38 Entertainment, Communication 6
Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby Emergency brake function when parking, Active
state 37 PDC 249
Driver profiles 66 Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis‐
Driver profile, setting up 66 tant 212
Driver profiles, welcome screen 66 Emergency service, see Accident Assis‐
Driving 134 tance 392
Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 182 Emergency service, see Roadside Assis‐
Driving comfort 272, 277 tance 392
Driving Dynamics Control 137 Emergency stop assistant 212
Driving instructions, breaking in 322 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 339
Driving mode, ECO PRO 332 Emergency unlocking, rear seat backrest 116
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 150
trol 137 Emergency wheel 373
Driving notes, general 323 Energy recovery 154
Driving on bad roads 322 Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 162
Driving out of a parking space, see Parking As‐ Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 134
sistant 262 Engine compartment 375
Driving stability control systems 219 Engine coolant 382
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 336 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 334
Driving through water 324 Engine oil, adding 380
Driving tips 323 Engine oil change 382
Drying air, see Air conditioning 281 Engine oil filler neck 380
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 219 Engine oil temperature 161
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 221 Engine oil types to add 381
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M chassis/ Engine start, jump-starting 394
suspension 277 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 38
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐ Engine temperature 161
sion 277 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 219 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 221 tion 6
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
E Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication 6
ECO PRO 332
412
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Flat tire warning light, FTM 366
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Flat tire warning light, TPM 362
Entry comparison, navigation 41 Flooding 324
Equipment, interior 297 Floor carpet, care 401
Error indicators, see Check Control 155 Floor mats, care 401
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 219 Fold-away position of the wipers 145
Evasion Assistant 187 Foot brake 324
Exchanging wheels and tires 351 Fording depth 324
Exhaust gas system 323 Forward collision mitigation, see Intelligent
Exhaustion warner 217 Safety 182
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 323 For Your Own Safety 8
Experience Modes 53 Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐
Exterior lighting during unlocking 79 age 293
Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 80 Fragrance, see Ambient air package 293
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 123 Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 293
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 122 Front airbags 178
Exterior mirrors 122 Front collision mitigation 183
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 122 Front fog lights 175
External start 394 Front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and
External temperature 161 bulbs 388
Eyelet for towing 397 Front lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 388
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 314 Front passenger seat function, see Gentleman
function 114
F Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐
vation 181
Factory settings, see Reset vehicle configura‐ Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 181
tion 64 Front seats 111
Failure message, see Check Control 155 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 366
False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Fuel 378
alarms 106 Fuel cap 338
Fan, see Air flow 283 Fuel filler flap 338
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 117 Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 339
Fatigue alert 217 Fuel gauge 159
Fault indicators, see Check Control 155 Fuel quality 378
Filler neck for engine oil 380 Fuel recommendation 378
Fine wood parts, care 400 Fuel, tank capacity 406
First-aid kit 391 Fuel, tank capacity, see Technical data 402
Fittings for trailer safety chain, trailer towing 330 Fuses 389
Flag bracket 325
Flat tire, changing wheels 368 G
Flat tire, continued driving 364, 368
Flat tire message, FTM 366 Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Flat tire message, TPM 362 Remote Control 297
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 366 Gasoline 378
Flat tire, repairing 353 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 146
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 359 Gear shift indicator 162
413
General driving notes 323 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
General settings 60 tant 173
Gentleman function 114 Hill Descent Control HDC 222
Gesture Control 54 Hills 325
Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 54 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 219
Glare shield, see Sun visor 300 Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 310
Glass sunroof, electric 108 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 110 Control 297
Glove compartment 308 Homepage, see Internet 6
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 63 Hood 376
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Horn 32
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 100
Gross vehicle weight, approved 403 Hot exhaust gas system 323
Gross weight, permissible for trailer towing 404 Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight
Ground clearance, see xOffroad package 275 glass 388
Hydroplaning 324
H
I
Handbrake, see Parking brake 139
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 298 iBrake – PostCrash 216
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for Ice warning, see External temperature 161
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Icy roads, see External temperature 161
Hazard warning flashers 391 Identification marks, tires 348
HDC Hill Descent Control 222 Identification number, see Vehicle identification
Head airbags 179 number 12
Headlight control, automatic 170 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
Headlight courtesy delay feature 172 state 37
Headlight courtesy delay feature, switching iDrive 40
on 81 ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 78
Headlight flasher 143 Ignition key, see Vehicle key 78
Headlight glass 388 Indicator/warning lights 156
Headlights, care 399 Individual air distribution 283
Headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 388 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 66
Head restraint pillow 121 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Head restraints and seats 111 charging tray 304
Head restraints, front 119 Inflation pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure
Head restraints, rear 120 Monitor TPM 359
Head-up Display 167 Inflation pressure, tires 340
Head-up Display, care 401 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 366
Head-up Display, store position, see Memory Information 6
function 124 Information window, Control Display 63
Heated steering wheel 124 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 366
Heavy cargo, stowing 314 Initialization, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 361
High-beam Assistant 173 Input and display 40
High beams 143 Instrument cluster 152
Instrument lighting 176
414
Integral Active Steering 224 L

Integrated key 87
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 14 Label on recommended tires 351
Integrated Universal Remote Control 297 Lane control assistant 239
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function 136 Lane departure warning 200
Intelligent emergency call 393 Lane lines, Surround View 256
Intelligent Personal Assistant 52 Lane threshold, warning 200
Intelligent Safety 182 Language, set on Control Display 62
Intended use 8 Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Intensity, AUTO program 282 bulbs 388
Interior camera, see Driver Attention Camera 63 Laser high beams 175
Interior equipment 297 Lashing eyes in the cargo area 314
Interior lights 176 LATCH child restraint fixing system 131
Interior lights during unlocking 79 Launch Control 150
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 80 Leather care 400
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 123 LED front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and
Interior motion sensor 105 bulbs 388
Internet connection 73 LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Internet hotspot 73 bulbs 388
Internet page 6 LED light carpet, see Welcome light 172
Intersection collision warning 190 LEDs, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 388
Interval display, see Service notifications 161 Letters and numbers, entering 41
Ionization, see Ambient air package 293 Light-alloy wheels, care 400
Light control, adaptive 173
J Light-emitting diodes, replacing LEDs, see
Lights and bulbs 388
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 371 Lighter, cigarettes 301
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 109 Lighting 170
Jam protection system, windows 107 Lighting, loudspeaker, see Bowers & Wil‐
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 146 kins 177
Jump-starting 394 Light in the exterior mirror, see Blind spot colli‐
Jump-starting terminals 395 sion warning 204
Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic
K warning 268
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 388
Kenaf, care 400 Lights 170
Key Card, see BMW Digital Key 93 Lights and bulbs 388
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 89 Light switch 170
Key, mechanical 87 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 225
Key, see BMW Digital Key 93 List of all messages 60
Key, see BMW display key 83 Load 314
Key, see Vehicle key 78 Loading 313
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 146 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 314
Knee airbag 179 Location, vehicle position 63
Lock control elements, rear automatic climate
control 288
415
Locking, automatic 103 Measurement, units of 62

Locking, see Opening and Closing 78 Media of the Owner's Manual 14
Locking, settings 102 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 391
Locking the tailgate, see Valet parking Memory function 124
mode 100 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection
Locking, vehicle key 79 lists 164
Lock, lug bolts 370 Menus, operating, iDrive 40
Loudspeaker lighting, see Bowers & Wilkins 177 Messages 60
Low beams 171 Messages, see Check Control 155
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ Microfilter 284
tant 173 Minimum tread depth, tires 350
Lower back support 113 Mirrors 123
Lower tailgate 99 Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
Lug bolt lock 370 cle 324
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage Mobile devices, managing 76
rack 326 Mobile phone, connecting 70
Lumbar support 113 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
M Mobility System 353
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 229
Maintenance 385 Mode, ECO PRO 332
Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Service CBS 385 Safety 8
Maintenance, see Service notifications 161 Monitor, see Control Display 43
Maintenance system, BMW 385 Mount for trailer hitch, care 401
Make-up mirror 300 Mounting for trailer hitch 329
Malfunction, BMW display key 86 Mounting of child restraint systems 129
Malfunction, vehicle key 82 MP3 player, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Managing devices 76 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Manual air distribution 283 M sport differential, active 222
Manual air flow 283 Multi-function hook 315
Manual brake, see Parking brake 139 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32
Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 146 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 339 Entertainment and Communication 6
Manual Speed Limiter 225 Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Music track, gesture control 55
Marking, run-flat tire 352
Massage seat, front 125 N
Matte finish 399
Maximum cooling 281 Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Entertainment and Communication 6
Info 163 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 119
Maximum speed of winter tires 352 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 120
M chassis/suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive M Net, cargo area 315
chassis/suspension 277 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels 400
416
New wheels and tires 351 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 105
Night Vision device, see Night Vision 197 Panic mode 105
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ Panorama View, see Surround View 254
tion 197 Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 108
Nose weight, see Drawbar nose weight 404 Park Distance Control PDC 247
No-touch opening and closing of the tailgate 91 Parked-car ventilation 288
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 396 Parking aid, see PDC 247
Parking Assistant 262
O Parking assistant Plus, see Surround View 254
Parking Assistant, see Parking Assistant 262
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 386 Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 139
Object detection, see Night Vision 197 Parking brake 139
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 253 Parking lights 171
Obstacle marking, Surround View 256 Parts and accessories 8
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel Passenger's side mirror, tilting, see Automatic
grade 379 Curb Monitor 123
Odometer, see Trip data 165 Pathway lines, rearview camera 253
Oil, adding 380 PDC Park Distance Control 247
Oil change 382 Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 197
Oil change interval, see Service notifications 161 Performance Control 278
Oil filler neck 380 Performance display, see Sport displays 166
Oil level, checking electronically 379 Personal data, deleting 65
Oil types to add, engine 381 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 66
Onboard Computer, see Trip data 165 Personal settings 65
Onboard Diagnosis OBD 386 Person warning with braking function 194
Onboard literature, printed 14 Phone, connecting 70
Onboard vehicle tool kit 387 Pillow for head restraints in the rear 121
On-call service, see Accident Assistance 392 Plastic parts, care 400
On-call service, see Roadside Assistance 392 PostCrash – iBrake 216
Opening and closing 78 Power failure 389
Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digital Power windows 106
Key 93 Pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure Monitor
Operating concept, iDrive 40 TPM 359
Operation, app 54 Pressure, tires 340
Outside air, see AUC 282 Pressure warning FTM, tires 366
Overheating of the engine, see Engine tempera‐ Printed onboard literature 14
ture 161 Profiles, see Driver profiles 66
Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 42
age 401 Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐
Owner's Manual, printed 14 tection system 109
Owner's Manual via voice operation 54 Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐
tion system 107
P Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 43
Paint, vehicle 399

Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 70
417
Q Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
Queuing Assistant, see Steering and traffic jam tion 6
assistant 239 Remote Software Upgrade 57
Removable ball head 329
R Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 388
Replacing parts 387
Racing track 326 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 81
Radiator fluid 382 Replacing wheels and tires 351
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Reporting safety malfunctions 13
tertainment and Communication 6 Reserve warning, see Range 161
Rain sensor 144 Resetting, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 361
Rear automatic climate control 286 Reset, vehicle configuration 64
Rear automatic climate control, lock control ele‐ Reset vehicle settings 64
ments 288 RESUME button, see Active Cruise Control 229
Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ RESUME button, see Cruise control 227
ing 224 Retreaded tires 352
Rear collision preparation 211 Roadside Assistance 392
Rear collision warning, see Rear collision prepa‐ Roadside Assistance, see Accident Assis‐
ration 211 tance 392
Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 388 Roadside parking lights 171
Rear seat backrests, folding down 316 Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 108
Rear seat backrest tilt 115 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 298
Rear seats 114 RON recommended fuel grade 379
Rear ventilation, third row of seats, ventilation, Roofliner 36
third row of seats 285 Roof-mounted luggage rack 326
Rearview camera, see Surround View 254 Rope for tow-starting/towing 396
Rearview camera, without Surround View 252 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Rear-view mirror, internal 123 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Rearview mirrors, exterior 122 RSC Runflat System, see Runflat tire 352
Rear window defroster 284 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Rear window wiper, operation 145 tertainment, Communication 6
Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated- Rubber components, care 400
charcoal filter 284 Run-flat tire 352
Recirculated-air mode 282
Recommended fuel grade 379 S
Recommended tire brands 351
Refueling 338 Safe braking 324
Remote 3D View 261 Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key/Key
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐ Card 93
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front
cation 6 passenger seat 118
Remote control, see Vehicle key 78 Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 119
Remote control, universal 297 Safety belts 117
Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate Safety belts, care 401
control 290 Safety locks, doors and windows 133
418
Safety package, see Active Protection 215 Signaling, horn 32

Safety switch, windows 107 Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐
Safety systems, see Airbags 178 nals from the vehicle 102
Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 182 Sitting safely 111
Saving fuel 331 Situational adaptation 53
Screen Mirroring, connection 75 Size 402
Screen, see Control Display 43 Sizes, see Technical data 402
Sealant, see Mobility System 353 Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 108
Seat and armrest heating 125 Smartphone, connecting 70
Seat heating 125 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Seating position for children 128 Entertainment and Communication 6
Seats and head restraints 111 Smartphone, using via voice activation 51
Seats, front 111 Smoker's package 300
Seats, rear 114 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐
Seat ventilation, active 126 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
Securing, cargo 314 cation 6
Selection list in instrument cluster 164 SMS text message, supplementary 156
Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 146 Snow chains 358
Self-leveling suspension, see 2-axle air suspen‐ Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 386
sion 272 Sockets 302
Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 352 Software Update, see Remote Software Up‐
Sensors, care 401 grade 57
Service and warranty 9 Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐
Service Center, see Accident Assistance 392 grade 57
Service notifications 161 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 393
Service requirements, see Condition Based Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Service CBS 385 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 373
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐ Special equipment, see Vehicle features and op‐
tion 6 tions 7
SET button, see Active Cruise Control with Speed Limit Assist 238
Stop&Go function 229 Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 225
SET button, see Cruise control 227 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 163
Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with Speed Limit Info 163
Stop&Go function 229 Speed warning 62
Setting, Control Display 64 Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M chas‐
Settings, general 60 sis/suspension 277
Settings, locking/unlocking 102 Sport displays 166
Settings, seats and head restraints 111 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Settings vehicle configuration, reset 64 Control 137
Setup assistant 66 SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 146 trol 137
Shift point indicator, tachometer 160 Sport program, Steptronic transmission 146
Side airbag 178 SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 137
Side protection, Surround View 256 Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspension
Side protection without Surround View 250 Professional 278
419
Stability control systems 219 Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat‐
Standard equipment, see Vehicle features and ing 125
options 7 Surround View 254
Standby state, idle state and drive-ready Surround View, gesture control 55
state 37 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
Start/stop, automatic function 134 trol 137
Start/Stop button 134 Swinging of trailer, see Trailer stabilization con‐
Starting aid terminals 395 trol 329
Starting, see Drive-ready state 38 Switches, see Cockpit 32
Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 38 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐
Stationary climate control via Remote Engine ics Control 137
Start 290 Switching off the engine, see Drive-ready
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for state 38
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Symbols and displays 7
Status control display, tires 360 SYNC program, automatic climate control 283
Status information, iDrive 41
Status of Owner's Manual 7 T
Status, vehicle 167
Steering and traffic jam assistant 239 Tachometer 160
Steering, see Integral Active Steering 224 Tailgate, automatic 98
Steering wheel, adjusting 123 Tailgate, opening and closing with no-touch acti‐
Steering wheel, buttons 32 vation 91
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic Tailgate, vehicle key 80
transmission 146 Tail lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 388
Steptronic transmission 146 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8
Storage compartment, cargo area 315 Technical data 402
Storage compartment, center console 309 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Storage compartments 308 Entertainment and Communication 6
Storage compartments, locations 308 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Storage, tires 352 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Store Mirror position, see Memory function 124 Temperature, automatic climate control 280
Store seat position, see Memory function 124 Temperature display, see External tempera‐
Store steering wheel position, see Memory func‐ ture 161
tion 124 Temperature, engine oil 161
Storing the vehicle 401 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 104
Stowing, cargo 314 Thermal camera, see Night Vision 197
Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Thigh support 112
area 314 Third row of seats 116
Suitable devices 71 Tilt alarm sensor 105
Suitable mobile phones 71 Tilt, backrest 112
Summer tires, tread 349 Tilting, passenger's side mirror, see Automatic
Sun visor 300 Curb Monitor 123
Sun visor, sliding 300 Time 61
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 14 Tire brands, recommended 351
Supplementary SMS text message 156 Tire damage 350
Tire identification marks 348
420
Tire inflation pressure 340 Trip odometer, see Trip data 165
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM Flat Turning circle line, Surround View 256
Tire Monitor 366 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 253
Tire pressure 340 Turn signal, indicator light 158
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 359 Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 353 bulbs 388
Tires and wheels 340 Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 142
Tires, changing 351
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 353 U
Tire settings 359
Tires, run-flat 352 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 106
Tire tread 349 Units of measurement 62
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐ Universal remote control 297
tainment and Communication 6 Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 146
Tools 387 Unlocking, automatic 103
Torque display, see Sport displays 166 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 78
Total vehicle weight 403 Unlocking, settings 102
Touchpad, Controller 46 Unlocking, vehicle key 79
Tow bar 396 Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 322
Tow fitting 397 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7
Towing 395 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 57
Tow rope 396 Upholstery material care 400
Tow-starting 395 Upper backrest, front 113
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 359 USB connection 73
Traction control 221 USB interface, position in vehicle 303
TRACTION, driving dynamics 221 Used battery, disposing of 389
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Use, intended 8
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steering and traffic jam V
assistant 239
Trailer hitch, care 401 Valet parking mode 100
Trailer hitch, removable ball head 329 Vanity mirror 300
Trailer hitch, view of rearview camera 253 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐
Trailer hitch, view of Surround View 256 ing 224
Trailer loads 404 Vehicle battery 388
Trailer stabilization control 329 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐
Trailer towing 327 tance 391
Trailer towing, activation 329 Vehicle, breaking in 322
Trailer towing, data 404 Vehicle care 399
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 150 Vehicle care products 399
Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 146 Vehicle configuration, reset 64
Transporting children safely 128 Vehicle features and options 7
Travel & Comfort System 307 Vehicle identification number 12
Tread, tires 349 Vehicle key 78
Trip data 165 Vehicle key, additional 81
Triple turn signal activation 142 Vehicle key, integrated key 87
421
Vehicle key, loss 81 Wash view, Surround View 256

Vehicle key, malfunction 82 Water on roads 324
Vehicle key, replacing the battery 81 Water, see Condensation water under the parked
Vehicle key with display, malfunction 86 vehicle 325
Vehicle key with display, see BMW display Website, see Internet 6
key 83 Weights 403
Vehicle paint 399 Weights, see Technical data 402
Vehicle position, vehicle location 63 Welcome light during unlocking 79
Vehicle status 167 Welcome lights 172
Vehicle storage 401 Welcome screen, driver profiles 66
Vehicle washing 398 Wheel cleaner, light-alloy wheels 400
Ventilation 284 Wheels and tires 340
Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 288 Wheels and tires, replacing 351
Venting, see Ventilation 284 Wheels, changing 351
Vent, see Ventilation 284 Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 366
Version Software, see Remote Software Up‐ Widgets, iDrive 41
grade 57 WiFi connection 73
Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 214 WiFi connection, see WLAN connection 73
Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ WiFi hotspot, see Internet connection 73
tertainment and Communication 6 Window, defrosting 284
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12 Windows, powered 106
Voice activation 48 Windshield, defrosting 284
Voice activation, gesture control 55 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 383
Voice activation, see BMW Intelligent Personal Windshield washer nozzles 145
Assistant 52 Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper
Voice activation system 48 system 143
Voice command response 48 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 143
Volume, gesture control 55 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 401
W Winter tires 352
Winter tires, tread 350
Wake word 49 Wiper blades, replacing 387
Warning/indicator lights 156 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 383
Warning against cross traffic 268 Wiper, fold-away position 145
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Blind Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 143
spot collision warning 204 Wiper system 143
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
traffic warning 268 charging tray 304
Warning messages, see Check Control 155 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 304
Warning triangle 391 WLAN connection 73
Warranty 8 Wood parts, care 400
Washer fluid 383 Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 41
Washer nozzles, windshield 145 Working in, engine compartment 376
Washer system 143 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 387
Washing systems, automatic 398
Washing, vehicle 398
422
xDrive 221
xOffroad package 275
423
*BL291368600B*
01402913686 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL291368600B*
01402913686 ue

2020 BMW x5 76636 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2020 BMW x5 76636 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 BMW x5 76636 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402913686 - X/19

After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

© 2019 Bayerische Motoren Werke

After a software update in the

Symbols and displays Vehicle features and

▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

Data memory This information generally records the state of a

Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.

Windshield You can also obtain other information about mo‐

For Canadian customers

The vehicle identification number can also be

Reporting safety defects

Owner's Manual media

Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Scrolling through the Owner's

General information The owner's manual is directly dis‐

Opening via iDrive

1. Press the button.

Opening when a Check Control

Programmable memory buttons

Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Locking the vehicle

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

1 Light switch element

iDrive Terminating the voice activation system

Buttons on the Controller

Opens the main menu.

Opens the Apps menu.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menu for

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering

If no other commands are possible, operate the

Set-up and use

▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

Adjusting the head restraint

Push switch up or down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

Electrical steering wheel adjustment

1 Changing the entertainment source

Memory function Navigation destination entry

Press or move the controller up to apply the Using the phone

7. Select desired destination. "Accept"

5. Depending on the mobile device, a control

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Auto Start/Stop function

Setting To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you